Yamaha R-V1105 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: R-V1105

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: El manual del propietario

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio vidéo

R -V1105

U C A T

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating

instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause

the unit and

cart combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit

should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its

location or position does not interfere with its proper

ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated

on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the

ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow

of air through the ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances

that produce heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating

instructions or as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating

instructions. All other servicing should be referred to

qualified service personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol, within an equilateral triangle,

is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

•

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

CAUTION

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of your unit

in the space below.

Model:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of

the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place

for future reference.

English

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.

Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try

to eliminate the problem by using one of the following

measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of

your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the

sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is

grounded so as to provide some protection against

voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of

the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides

information with regard to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to

an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to

grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding

electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a Yamaha Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP)

System—an extremely sophisticated audio component. The DSP system takes full

advantage of Yamaha’s undisputed leadership in the field of digital audio processing

to bring you a whole new world of listening experiences. Follow the instructions in this

manual carefully when setting up your system, and the DSP system will sonically

transform your room into a wide range of listening environments—anything from a

famous concert hall to a cozy jazz club. In addition, you get incredible realism from

most of surround-sound encoded video sources available in the market using the built-

in Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder, Dolby Digital Decoder and DTS Decoder.

Five built-in channels of amplification on this model mean that no additional

amplifiers are required to enjoy advanced digital sound field processing.

Rather than tell you about the wonders of digital sound field processing, however,

let’s get right down to the business of setting up the system and trying out its many

capabilities. Please read this operation manual carefully and store it in a safe place for

later reference.

English

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

........................................... Inside of the Front Cover

CAUTION .................................................................. 2

INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 3

Features .................................................................... 3

What’s DSP?............................................................. 4

GETTING STARTED ................................................ 7

Getting started.......................................................... 7

Unpacking.............................................................. 7

Installing batteries in the remote controller ........... 8

Notes about the remote controller.......................... 8

Controls and their functions................................... 9

Front panel............................................................. 9

Display panel........................................................ 11

PREPARATION ...................................................... 12

Speaker setup......................................................... 12

Connections ........................................................... 14

Audio/video source equipment ............................ 14

Speakers ............................................................. 20

Antennas ............................................................. 23

Plugging in this unit ............................................. 25

On screen display.................................................. 26

Selecting the output modes

(“SET MENU” mode) ............................................. 27

Speaker balance adjustment ................................ 30

BASIC OPERATION ............................................... 33

Playing a source .................................................... 33

Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing

from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD)......................... 37

Sound control......................................................... 38

Tuning ..................................................................... 39

Basic operation ................................................... 39

Preset tuning........................................................ 40

Using digital sound field processor (DSP) ......... 43

Playing a source with an effect of the digital

sound field processor (DSP)................................ 43

Adjusting output level of the center, right rear,

left rear speakers and subwoofer......................... 46

Brief overview of digital sound field programs...... 48

ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................... 51

“SET MENU” mode ............................................... 51

Creating your own sound fields .......................... 55

Setting the SLEEP timer ....................................... 60

REMOTE CONTROLLER ....................................... 61

Basic operation ..................................................... 61

Key name and function ......................................... 62

Entering manufacturer codes .............................. 67

Restoring the default codes ................................. 68

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 69

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 72

LIST OF MANUFACTURE’S CODE

.............................................. The end of this manual

CONTENTS

1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from

windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,

dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming

(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not expose the unit to rain or water.

3. Never remove the unit cover. Contact your dealer if an

object falls inside the unit.

4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires.

When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and

the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull on the

wires themselves.

5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of

the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature

inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing

objects against these openings, and install the unit in a

well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage.

Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm

on the both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the

unit to prevent fire and damage.

6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on

this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than

specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other

accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any

damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other

than specified.

7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with

other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move

this unit farther away from such equipment if interference

is observed.

8. Always set the VOLUME control to “–

∞

” before starting

the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an

appropriate level after playback has been started.

9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents;

this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

10.Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

regarding common operating errors before concluding that

the unit is faulty.

11.When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time,

disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

12.To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power

plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm.

13.Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not

defeated.

14.Do not connect an audio unit to the AC outlet on the rear

panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet

is rated to provide.

15.Voltage Selector (China and General Models only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must

be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode.

In this mode, this unit is designed to consume a small

amount of power.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models

only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located

at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area.

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of

this unit from the AC outlet.

For Canadian Customers

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide

slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES–003.

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this

unit may be damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE

STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED;

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to

either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit

is in the standby mode.

REAR

(SURROUND)

SWITCHED

I20V 60Hz

I00W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR

CENTER

MAIN

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B: I6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

CENTER

MAIN

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

(U.S.A. model)

CAUTION : Read this before operating your unit.

English

5 Channel Power Amplification

Main: 85W + 85W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Center: 85W (8Ω) RMS Output Power,

0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Rear: 85W + 85W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

●

Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)

●

Dolby Digital Decoder

●

Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder

●

DTS Decoder

●

CINEMA DSP:Theater-like Sound

Experience by the Combination of

YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby

Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS

●

Automatic Input Balance Control for

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

●

Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker

Balance Adjustment

●

Speaker Output Mode Selection

Capability for the Most Suitable

Use of Your Speaker System

Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner

● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

● Automatic Preset Tuning

● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset

Editing)

● IF Count Direct PLL Synthesizer Tuning

System

Others

●

“SET MENU”Mode which Provides You

with 13 Titles of Setting Changes and

Adjustments for Optimizing This Unit for

Your Audio/Video System

● BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing

Bass Response

● On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

● SLEEP Timer

●

OPTICAL and COAXIAL Digital Audio

Signal Terminals

● 6 Channel External Decoder Input for

Other Future Formats

● Video Signal Input/Output Capability

(Including S Video Connections)

● Universal Remote Controller with Preset

Manufacturer Codes

Features

INTRODUCTION

Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment.

This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV

receiver available. Some of the more advanced features may

not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art

technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater

Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have

probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature

films in theaters around the world.

To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this

unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening

environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound

field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an

outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take

some time now to read more about these features and enjoy

the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater.

Digital Sound Field Processing

Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30

years have enhanced the listening experience with improved

clarity, precision and power. However, something has still been

missing: The atmosphere and acoustic ambiance of the public

venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched

the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects

inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters

and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of

those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they

collected is used to recreate these environments in digital

sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields are created

using data measured directly at the original venue; others are

created from combinations of data to form unique

environments for specific purposes.

Of course, that only solves half of the problem. These

engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your

listening room, so we’ve made it possible for you to adjust the

various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to

your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any

source and in combination with any of the following surround

sound technologies. Some are designed especially for music,

and some especially for movies.

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

Dolby Pro Logic Surround has been used in movie theaters

since the mid-seventies. It has also been available in home

entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to

be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four

discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and

dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a

center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound

effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow

frequency range.

Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Pro Logic

Surround encoding as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The

Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder built into this unit employs a

digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel

for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with

standard analog processors.

Introduction

What’s DSP?

INTRODUCTION

English

Dolby Digital is the next level of Dolby Surround sound system

developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate

audio coding.

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides

completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby

Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes

referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left,

center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only

effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency

effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other

channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE

channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to

the term 5.1 channels in total.

Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system

(left front, center, right front and just one surround channel),

Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or

split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the

three front channels.

By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience

the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater

sound in your home.

Wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full range

channels and precise sound orientation by the digital sound

processing presents listeners much excitement and realism

that has never been experienced before.

Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as mentioned left, and

moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2

channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2

channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby

Digital in the market.

Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit

from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be

applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of

Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide

an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation. “DOLBY”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to

replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete

channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many

theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system

changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six

discrete channels of superb digital audio.

The DTS technology, through intense research and

development, made it possible to deliver a similar

encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surround-

sound entertainment.

The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which

delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically

5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and

two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as

“0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that

are currently available for home theater systems

The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the

six channels of 20-bit audio onto some laserdiscs, compact

discs and DVDs with considerably less data-compression.

By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can

experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS

installed theater’s high quality sound in your home.

Laserdisc, compact disc and DVD are home audio format

within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel

audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new

multi-channel music recordings will also become available in

the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.)

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued

and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of

DTS Digital Surround

Dolby Digital

INTRODUCTION

Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and

the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround-

decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide

acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the

room, letting you feel much presence as if you were

watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater.

This combination is available when the digital sound field

program No. 2, 3 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 1 is

selected, and the input signal of the source is analog, PCM

audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channels.

Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and

the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby

Digital-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field

respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and

much surround effect in the room without losing high

channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby

Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you

feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby

Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This is the

most ideal home theater sound at the present time.

This combination is available when the digital sound field

program No. 2, 3 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS DIGITAL

SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 1 is selected, and the input signal

of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (except in 2-

channels) or encoded with the DTS.

CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP

The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full

ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are

originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater

that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound

environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is

difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the

number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening

room is very different from a movie theater.

However, Yamaha DSP technology allows you to create nearly

the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in

your home by compensating for the lack of presence and

dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields

combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround

sounds.

The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs

that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Surround or DTS.

CINEMA DSP

INTRODUCTION

English

GETTING STARTED

Getting started

Remote controller

Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3)

Indoor FM Antenna

AM Loop Antenna

Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

DIR DIR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SELECT

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

Unpacking

Carefully remove this unit and accessories from the box. You should find the unit itself and the following accessories.

Installing batteries in the remote

controller

Since the remote controller will be used for many of this unit’s

control operations, you should begin by installing the supplied

batteries.

1. Turn the remote controller over and slide the battery

compartment cover in the direction of the arrow.

2. Insert the batteries (AA, R6, UM-3 type) according to the

polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery compartment cover.

Notes about the remote controller

Battery replacement

If you find that the remote controller must be used closer to the

main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with

new ones.

Notes

●

Use AA, R6, UM-3 batteries.

●

Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside

the battery compartment.)

●

Remove the batteries if the remote controller is not used for

an extended period of time.

●

If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material and contact with clothing, etc.

Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

Be sure to insert the new batteries within 2 minutes after

you remove the old batteries from the remote controller. If

the remote controller is left for more than 2 minutes without

batteries, all of the codes you entered will be cleared and

the remote controller will return to the factory preset

condition.

Remote controller operation range

Notes

●

The area between the remote controller and the main unit

must be clear of large obstacles.

●

Do not expose the remote control sensor to strong lighting,

in particular, an inverter type fluorescent lamp. Otherwise,

the remote controller may not work properly. If necessary,

position the main unit away from direct lighting.

30°

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately

6 m (19.7 feet)

GETTING STARTED

English

Controls and their functions

Front panel

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

8AB0CDIG

23 45 6

1 STANDBY/ON switch

Press this switch to turn on the power. Press this switch again

to set this unit in the standby mode.

* A click from the switch and the initial rotation of the built-in

fan will be heard when the power is turned on.

Standby mode

This unit is still using a small amount of power in this mode

in order to be ready to receive infrared-signals from the

remote controller.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote controller.

3 Display panel

Displays a variety of information. (Refer to page 11 for details.)

4 TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button

Press this button repeatedly until the “TAPE/MD MONITOR

”

indicator is illuminated

on the display. Sound source played or

recorded on the unit connected to the TAPE/MD IN

(PLAY)/OUT (REC) AUDIO SIGNAL terminals on the rear of

this unit is selected as the input source taking priority of the

INPUT SELECTOR’s setting.

Press this button repeatedly until the “EXT. DECODER”

appears

on the display. Sound signals input to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit is selected

as the input source taking priority of the INPUT SELECTOR’s

setting.

Press this button repeatedly until the original display mode is

restored to cancel the above input sources.

5 INPUT SELECTOR

Turn this knob to select the input source.

The selected source will be shown on the display.

6 Master VOLUME control

Simultaneously controls volume for all output sounds; main,

rear, center and subwoofer. (The REC OUT level is not

affected.)

* The indicator on the master VOLUME control will flash when

the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the

remote controller.

7 PHONES jack

Headphones can be plugged into this jack for private listening.

You can listen to the sound to be output from the main

speakers through headphones. When listening with

headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A and B switches

to the OFF position and turn off the digital sound field

processor by pressing the EFFECT button so that no DSP

program name is illuminated on the display panel.

For the remote controller, refer to pages 61 to 68.

GETTING STARTED

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E button

Press this button to select a group (A–E) of preset stations.

9 SPEAKERS switches

Press the switch A or B (or both) for the main speakers you will

use inward (ON). Press and release the switch for the main

speakers you do not use outward (OFF).

0 Preset station number selector buttons

Select a preset station number (1 to 8).

A BASS EXTENSION button

Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency

response at the main left and right channels while maintaining

overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing

the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used.

B TONE BYPASS button

Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and

TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting

pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone

control circuitry can be used when this button is released

outward (OFF).

C BASS and TREBLE controls

Rotate these knobs to adjust the low and high frequency

response for the left and right main channels only.

D BALANCE control

This knob controls the sound from the main speakers only.

The balance of the output volume to the left and right main

speakers can be adjusted to compensate for sound imbalances

caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions.

E MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) button

Use this button to enter a station to memory. Refer to the

section “Manual preset tuning” on page 40 for details.

Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start

automatic preset tuning. Refer to page 41 for details.

F EDIT button

This button is used to exchange the places of two preset

stations with each other.

G TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) button

Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic

and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator is illuminated on the

display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so

that the “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated.

H FM/AM button

Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and

AM.

I LEVEL button

This button is used to adjust the output level of the center and

rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this button (several

times) to select the speaker(s). The name appears on the

display. Then press the + or – button (

) to change the output

level.

J –/+ button

Adjusts the level of the speaker(s) selected by pressing the

LEVEL button. Moreover, performs setting changes and

adjustments for functions selected by pressing the SET MENU

button (

K).

K SET MENU button

Press this button once or more to select the desired function in

the SET MENU mode.

L TUNING DOWN/UP button

Used for tuning. Press the “UP” side to tune in to a higher

frequency, and press the “DOWN” side to tune in to a lower

frequency.

M PROGRAM selector button

Press this button in the or direction to select a digital

sound field processing program.

N EFFECT button

Press this button to turn on and off the output from the center

and rear speakers. The sound becomes normal 2-channel

when this function is turned off.

However, this does not apply to Dolby Digital or DTS. The

signals at all channels will be distributed to the main channels

and output from the main speakers, even if the output from the

center and rear speakers are turned off, when Dolby Digital or

DTS is decoded.

O VIDEO AUX terminals

Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a

camcorder to these terminals. A video unit with a S video

output terminal can be connected to the S VIDEO terminal to

obtain a high resolution picture. The source can be selected

with the INPUT SELECTOR.

P INPUT MODE button

Press this button to select how input signals are received from

sources that output two or more types of signals. The “AUTO”,

“DTS” and “ANALOG” modes are available. Refer to page 36

for details.

GETTING STARTED

English

Display panel

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

MONITOR

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

SLEEP

ENHANCED MOVIE THEATER 12 TV SPORTS

MONO MOVIE DISCO JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT CHURCH CONCERT HALL

MEMORY

AUTO

0 20 100

STEREO

12 3

45 6 7 89 A B

1 indicators

Either “dts” indicators will be illuminated when the built-in DTS

decoder is turned on.

A red “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a compact

disc or laserdisc encoded with DTS.

An orange “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a

DVD encoded with DTS.

An orange “dts” indicator may be illuminated when playing a

laserdisc encoded with DTS after a video-CD or DVD on a

DVD/LD combi-player.

2 Multi-information display

This display shows the current DSP program and the status of

adjustments and setting changes. Several statuses can be

viewed at one time. The current station frequency and band

(AM or FM) will also appear when the tuner source input mode

is selected.

3 Input source indicators

One of the arrows for these indicators will be illuminated

depending on which source is selected.

4 DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators

The DIGITAL indicator will be illuminated when the built-in

Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the source

encoded with Dolby Digital are not 2-channels.

The PRO LOGIC indicator will be illuminated when the

built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on.

5 DSP indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in digital sound

field processor is on.

6 MEMORY indicator

A flashing MEMORY indicator means a station can be saved,

as explained in the following:

Press the MEMORY button. The MEMORY indicator will flash

about 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, program the

displayed station to memory by using the A/B/C/D/E and the

preset station number selector buttons.

7 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program will be illuminated in

the following cases.

• When the tuner is selected as the input source

• When a DSP program parameter is selected or adjusted.

• When the DSP program No. 2, 3 or the subprogram

“Enhanced” of No. 1 is selected.

There is no illumination here when no DSP program is

selected

8 AUTO indicator

This indicator will be illuminated during the automatic tuning

mode.

9 STEREO indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when an FM stereo broadcast

with sufficient signal strength is received.

0 Signal-level indicator

This indicator shows the signal level of the received station. If

multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases.

A TAPE/MD MONITOR indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when the tape deck (or MD

recorder etc.) connected to the TAPE/MD IN and OUT

terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source

by pressing the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button.

B SLEEP indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in SLEEP timer

is on.

GETTING STARTED

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field

quality with a full five-speaker system setup, using a pair of

main speakers to output main source sounds, a pair of effect

speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker

for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a five-

speaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of

effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive

ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to

begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the five-

speaker system later.

Use of the center dialog speaker is

recommended

When playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or

playing back a source which contains center-channel signals

with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are

output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to

maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater

system, it is recommended that you use a center channel

speaker.

If, for some reason, it is not practical to use a center speaker, it

is possible to enjoy the movie without it. Best results, however,

are obtained with the full system.

Use of a subwoofer expands your sound

field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer

is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any

or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the

subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a

source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded. You may wish to

choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier.

Speaker setup

m Speakers and speaker placement

Your full five-speaker system will require two speaker pairs:

the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers) and the

REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may

also be using a SUBWOOFER.

The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models

and have enough power handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system.

Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN

SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is

ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce

sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER and REAR

SPEAKERS.

Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the ordinary position.

Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position.

They should be nearly 1.8m above the floor.

Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two

MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker

above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically

shielded speaker.)

If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo

Processing Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is

not so critical because low bass tones are not highly

directional.

m Setting up your speaker system

Main speaker Center speaker Rear speaker

Subwoofer

PREPARATION

English

5 Speaker System

The recommended system for enjoying Audio/Video

sources.

By the use of a center speaker, center channel sounds (dialog,

vocals etc.) are precisely localized.

1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “LRG” or “SML”.

(See page 27.)

4 Speaker System

Basic system.

You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding a pair of

rear speakers to a basic stereo speaker system.

However, center channel sounds must be output from the left

and right main speakers.

1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “NONE”. (See page 27.)

m Speaker system configurations

PREPARATION

Caution: Plug in this unit and other components after all connections are completed.

All connections must be correct, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also refer to the owner’s manual for

each of your components.

Audio/video source equipment

●

Use RCA type pin plug cables for audio/video units with the exception described later.

●

The output (or input) terminals of YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 3, 4, etc. on the rear panel must be connected to

the same-numbered terminals of this unit.

PHONO CD

TAPE

MD DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR

IN OUT

1 3 4

AUDIO SIGNAL

ANT

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

SUB

WOOFER

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

IN (PLAY) OUT (REC)

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

GND

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

VCR

VIDEO SIGNALS VIDEO SIGNAL

OUTPUT

LINE OUT

LINE IN

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

OUTPUT

GND

VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

(U.S.A. model)

Turntable

MD recorder,

Tape deck, etc.

CD player

m Basic connections

(*1): GND terminal (For turntable use)

Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND

terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases

better results may be obtained with the ground wire

disconnected.

: Indicates the direction of signals.

Connections

PREPARATION

(*1)

LD player, DVD player, etc.

TV monitor

Video cassette

recorder

TV/Satellite tuner

English

PREPARATION

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

S VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

S VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT L

AUDIO OUT R

Camcorder

For Custom Installer (

For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

(U.S.A. model)

VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel)

These terminals are used to connect a video input source such

as a camcorder.

PAL/NTSC switch (China and General

models only)

This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL television

formats. Set this switch to the position for the format your TV

monitor employs.

PAL: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the PAL

format.

Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter which

format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an

external video unit to this unit.

NTSC: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the

NTSC format.

Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter which

format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an

external video unit to this unit.

Note

Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same format

that your TV monitor employs, otherwise a picture will not be

played back normally.

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO VIDEO

PAL NTSC

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL DECO

MAIN CENTER

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

GND

SUB

WOOFER

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

REMOTE CONTROL (IN, OUT) terminals

These terminals are used for custom installation system.

When this unit is connected to the components for custom

installation system, you can operate this unit with the system

remote control.

Connect the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of this unit to

the output terminal of the central controller for custom

installation system.

By connecting the REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminal of this

unit to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of the other

component, you can also operate it with the system remote

control. In this way, up to 6 components can be connected in

series.

: S-video cable

(Refer to page 18 for details about the S

VIDEO terminal.)

Notes

●

When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital

and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to

both terminals of the same name.

●

Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals

are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from

dust.

●

In order to make this unit perform successful DTS-decoding,

the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or

corrupted in the process of sending the DTS bitstream from

the DIGITAL OUT terminal of an external unit to a digital

signal input terminal of this unit.

●

All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the

sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.

m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals

If your CD player, LD player, DVD player, TV/satellite tuner,

etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal

output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL

or OPTICAL, or both terminals.

Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog

audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are

necessary, especially for an LD player, a DVD player or a CD

player to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to

this unit.

To make an optical digital connection between this unit and an

external unit, remove the cover from each optical terminal, and

then connect them by using a commercially available optical

fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables

might not function correctly.

Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or

COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit

connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals

of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to this unit. You can switch the

selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily.

(See page 36 for details.)

ANT

GND

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

PHONO CD

TAPE

MD DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR

IN OUT

1 3 4

AUDIO SIGNAL

IN (PLAY) OUT (REC)

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

VCR

VIDEO SIGNALS VIDEO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

TV/Satellite tuner

(U.S.A. model)

PREPARATION

: Optical fiber cable

: Coaxial cable

LD player, DVD player, etc.

CD player

English

m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL RF output of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player

PREPARATION

If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF

signal output terminal, it can be connected to this unit by using

an RF demodulator (separate purchase).

First, connect the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal of

the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the DOLBY DIGITAL RF

signal input terminal of the RF demodulator. Next, connect the

coaxial digital signal output terminal of the RF demodulator to

the COAXIAL digital signal input terminal of this unit.

This connection is necessary for sending audio signals of an

LD source encoded with Dolby Digital to this unit.

It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to

this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the

DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back

a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal

stereo (or monaural).

You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal

of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD

digital signal input terminal of this unit.

This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source

with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD

source with DTS decoded.

When these connections are completed, set the input mode of

the DVD/LD source to “AUTO”, and you will hear sounds

decoded with Dolby Digital even if signals are input to both

COAXIAL and OPTICAL digital signal input terminals of this

unit. This is because signals input to the COAXIAL terminal

take priority over signals input to the OPTICAL terminal.

Refer to page 36 for details about switching the input mode.

Notes

●

If, for example, you play a CD on the DVD/LD/CD combi-

player, there is no input to the COAXIAL terminal, so the

signals input to the OPTICAL terminal take priority. In this

case, switch off the RF demodulator to listen to CD sound

without interference. However, if your RF demodulator is the

Yamaha model APD-1, you do not have to switch it off.

●

When you want to play an LD source encoded with Dolby

Digital without decoding Dolby Digital, you must switch off

the power of the RF demodulator.

ANT

GND

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

PHONO CD

TAPE

MD DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR

IN OUT

1 3 4

AUDIO SIGNAL

IN (PLAY) OUT (REC)

SUB

WOOFER

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

VCR

S VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

RF IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG

OUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

RF OUT

(U.S.A. model)

RF demodulator

DVD/LD/CD combi-

player, etc.

GND

ANT

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

PHONO CD

TAPE

MD DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR

IN OUT

1 3 4

AUDIO SIGNAL

IN(PLAY) OUT(REC)

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

VCR

VIDEO SIGNALS VIDEO SIGNAL

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO

OUT

m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals

If your video cassette recorder and your monitor are equipped

with “S” video terminals, connect this unit’s S VIDEO SIGNAL

VCR IN and OUT terminals to the “S” video input and output of

your video cassette recorder, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO

SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your

monitor. In addition, a video unit equipped with an “S” video

output can be connected to the VIDEO AUX S VIDEO terminal

on the front of this unit.

With these connections, you can play back or record high

quality pictures. Otherwise, connect the “composite” video

terminals from your video cassette recorder, etc. to the VIDEO

SIGNAL terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO

SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal to the “composite” video

input of your monitor.

Note

If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO

input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective

output terminals.

S VIDEO terminals

This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition

to standard type VIDEO terminals.

S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into

luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison

with S VIDEO terminals, standard type VIDEO terminals

transmit “composite” video signals.

Video cassette recorderTV monitor

PREPARATION

: S-video cable

(*1): ON SCREEN SELECTOR S VIDEO/VIDEO switch

Set this switch to either position to select the TV monitor on

which you want to display the on-screen information.

S VIDEO: The on-screen information is displayed on the TV

monitor connected to the S VIDEO SIGNAL

MONITOR OUT terminal.

VIDEO: The on-screen information is displayed on the TV

monitor connected to the composite VIDEO

SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal.

(*1)

(U.S.A. model)

English

This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal

input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear

surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) for

inputting signals from an external decoder of a future format to

this unit.

To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these

terminals, press the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button

on the front panel repeatedly until “EXT. DECODER” appears

on the display. By doing so, the signals input to these terminals

are sent to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and

OUTPUT terminals of this unit.

Notes

●

When signals input to these terminals are selected, the

digital sound field processor cannot be used.

●

The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER,” “2. REAR

SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT”

in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input

to these terminals. The setting of “5. MAIN LEVEL” is

effective. (Refer to pages 27 to 28 for details.)

●

The adjustments of the output level of the center speakers,

rear speakers and subwoofer are effective when the signals

input to these terminals are selected as the input source.

(Refer to pages 46 to 47 for details.)

Connecting an external decoder of a future format to this unit

GND

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

ANT

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

PHONO CD

TAPE

MD DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR

IN OUT

1 3 4

AUDIO SIGNAL

IN (PLAY) OUT (REC)

SUB

WOOFER

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

OUT

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

VCR

VIDEO SIGNALS VIDEO SIGNAL

DVD/LD

COAXIALOPTICAL OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBSCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

SUBWOOFER OUT

SURROUND OUT

CENTER OUT

MAIN OUT

External decoder

(U.S.A. model)

PREPARATION

Speakers

SPEAKERS

MAIN CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

CAUTION

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

MAIN

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

Center speaker

LeftRight

Main speakers B

Rear speakers

Subwoofer system

Left

Right

Left

Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit.

For connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

➀

Loosen the knob.

➁

Insert the bare wire.

[Remove approx. 5mm

(1/4”) insulation from

the speaker wires.]

➂

Tighten the knob and

secure the wire.

<U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models

only

Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the

Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal.

How to Connect:

Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with the wire of the proper gauge (keep as short as possible). If the

connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct. That is

the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

Caution

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit or the

speakers, or both.

PREPARATION

Main speakers A

English

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this

unit may be damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE

STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED:

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to

either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit

is in the standby mode.

Select the position whose requirements your speaker system

meets.

(Upper position)

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or

higher.

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or higher.

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

(Lower position)

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Main:

If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the

impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

REAR

(SURROUND)

SWITCHED

I20V 60Hz

I00W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR

CENTER

MAIN

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B: I6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

CENTER

MAIN

(U.S.A. model)

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

For connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS

terminals

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

➀

Press the tab.

➁

Insert the bare wire.

[Remove approx. 5mm

(1/4”) insulation from

the speaker wires.]

➂

Release the tab and

secure the wire.

Note on main speaker connections:

One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

SPEAKERS A or B terminals.

Note on a subwoofer connection:

You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies

or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when

reproducing discrete signals.

When using a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER terminal

of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier,

and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier

to the subwoofer.

With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo

Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer

are in the same unit. Such a subwoofer needs only the

connection between the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit

and the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer.

(Refer to page 22 for details about the SUBWOOFER

terminal.)

PREPARATION

➁

➂

➀

The speaker connections described on page 20 are fine for

most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to

drive main, center and/or rear speakers with your existing

amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for

connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit.

1 MAIN terminals

These terminals are for main channel line output.

If you drive main speakers with an external stereo power

amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external

amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a

receiver) to these terminals.

There is no connection to these terminals when you use

the built-in amplifier.

* Output signals from the MAIN terminals are affected by

the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, BASS

EXTENSION button and the TONE BYPASS button.

2 SUBWOOFER terminal

When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to

this terminal. Low frequencies distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal.

(The cut-off frequency of this terminal is 90 Hz.) Signals

of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when Dolby

Digital or DTS is decoded are also output if they are

assigned to this terminal.

3 CENTER terminal

This terminal is for center channel line output.

If you drive a center speaker with an external power

amplifier, connect the input terminal of the external

amplifier to this terminal.

There is no connection to this terminal when you use the

built-in amplifier.

4 REAR (SURROUND) terminals

These terminals are for rear channel line output.

If you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power

amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external

amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a

receiver) to these terminals.

There is no connection to these terminals when you use

the built-in amplifier.

Notes

•

Output level of signals from all of these terminals are

adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel

or VOLUME keys on the remote controller.

•

If an external power amplifier is connected to the MAIN,

CENTER, or REAR output terminals, do not use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals (MAIN, CENTER, or

REAR).

m To drive main, center and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers

MAIN CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

12 34

PREPARATION

English

Antennas

●

Each antenna should be connected to the designated terminals correctly, as shown in the following figure.

●

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal

strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality only with the indoor antennas, the use of an outdoor antenna may result in improvement.

GND

ON SCREEN SELECTOR

S VIDEO VIDEO

ANT

Ω

UNBAL.

GND

PHONO CD

TAPE

1 3

IN (PLAY)

COAXIALOPTICAL

DVD/LDCD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VCR

S VIDEO SIGNAL

Outdoor FM antenna

Outdoor AM antenna

AM loop

antenna

(included)

Ground

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

75-ohm coaxial cable

300-ohm flat

ribbon cable

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

m Connecting the AM loop antenna

1.Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole.

2.Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3.Return the tab back to the original position to lock the lead

wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good

connection.

4.Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.

5.Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is

obtained.

Notes

●

The AM loop antenna should be placed apart from the main

unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall.

●

The AM loop antenna should be kept connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

PREPARATION

(U.S.A. model)

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

Antenna stand

Loop antenna

m Connecting the indoor FM antenna

Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM

ANT terminal.

Note

Do not use an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM

antenna at the same time.

GND terminal

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect

the GND terminal to a good ground. A good ground is a

metal stake driven into moist earth.

m Optional outdoor FM antenna

Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best

method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna.

The choice of the flat ribbon cable is also important. Flat ribbon

cable performs well electrically, and is cheaper and somewhat

easier to handle when routing it through windows and around

rooms. Coaxial cable is more expensive, does a much better

job of minimizing interference, is less prone to the effects of

weather and close-by metal objects, and is nearly as good a

signal conductor as flat ribbon cable. Coaxial cable is

somewhat more difficult to install at the point where the cable

enters the building. If coaxial cable is selected, make sure the

antenna is designed to be used with this type of cable.

* Use a 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (not included) or a

75-ohm antenna adapter (not included) for connections.

300-ohm flat ribbon cable 75-ohm coaxial cable

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

Notes for FM antenna installation

●

To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise,

locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible.

●

Keep the flat ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as

possible. Do not bundle or roll up an excess of the cable.

●

The antenna should be at least two meters (6.6 feet) from

reinforced concrete walls or metal structures.

300-ohm flat

ribbon cable

75-ohm coaxial

cable

75-ohm antenna

adapter

75-ohm coaxial

cable

m Optional outdoor AM antenna

If this unit is placed in steel buildings or an area far from

broadcasting stations, it may be necessary to install an outside

long wire antenna.

PREPARATION

English

•

After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord

into an AC outlet.

•

Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is

not to be used for a long period of time.

MAIN CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SWITCHED

I00W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR

CENTER

MAIN

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B: I6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

CENTER

MAIN

(General model)

Plugging in this unit

AC OUTLET(S)

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models)

.......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

(Australia model).................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET

Use these to connect the power cords of your components to

this unit.

The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s

STANDBY/ON switch or the remote controller’s POWER and

STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply power to any

connected unit whenever this unit is turned on.

The maximum power (total power consumption of components)

that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is

100W.

Voltage Selector (China and General Models

only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be

set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the

AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

PREPARATION

(*1): (*2):

(*1)

(*2)

To AC outlet

PREPARATION

If you connect your VCR, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this

unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display

program titles, parameter data and information for various

setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor

screen. This information will be superimposed over the video

image.

If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the

information will be displayed over a blue colored background.

Note: The program titles, parameter data and other

information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit.

Selecting a type of display

You can change the type of display showing various

information on the monitor screen by pressing the ON

SCREEN display key on the remote controller.

Press this key to change the screen to a full or simple display,

or no display at all.

(Example)

Full display

Simple display

Goes off after being displayed for

several seconds.

Notes

●

When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET

MENU mode, or adjusting the speaker balance by using the

test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor

screen even if another type of display is currently selected.

●

Information displayed on the monitor screen in this way

cannot be recorded by a VCR.

DISP

INDEX

ON SCREEN

On screen display

English

1. CENTER SPEAKER

Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE

Preset position: LRG

LRG: When your center speaker is approximately the same

size as the main speakers.

SML: When you use a center speaker that is smaller than

the main speakers.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position

is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”).

NONE: When you do not have a center speaker.

The center channel sound will be output from the left

and right main speakers.

2. REAR SPEAKER

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: If your rear speakers have a high ability for bass

reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear

speaker in parallel.

In this position, full range signals are output from the

rear speakers.

SMALL: If your rear speakers do not have a high ability for

bass reproduction.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position

is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”).

The following functions control the output signals to the speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all

completed, select a proper position on each function to maximize the performance of your speaker system.

* For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 51 to 54.

1. CENTER SPEAKER

2. REAR SPEAKER

3. MAIN SPEAKER

4. LFE/BASS OUT

5. MAIN LEVEL

m Function description

Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU”mode)

PREPARATION

3. MAIN SPEAKER

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: If your main speakers have a high ability for bass

reproduction.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels are output from the main speakers.

SMALL: If your main speakers do not have a high ability for

bass reproduction. However, if your system does not

include a subwoofer, do not select this position.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on

“4. LFE/BASS OUT”).

4. LFE/BASS OUT

Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH

Preset position: SW

MAIN: If your system does not include a subwoofer.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels, signals from the LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER

SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed

from other channels are output from the main

speakers.

SW/BOTH:

Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system

includes a subwoofer.

In either position, signals at LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER

SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed

from other channels are output from the

SUBWOOFER terminals.

When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN

SPEAKER”, in the SW position, no signal is

distributed from the main channels to the

SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH

position, low bass signals from the main channels

are output to both of the main speakers and the

SUBWOOFER terminals.

5. MAIN LEVEL

Choices: Normal/–10dB

Preset position: Normal

Normal: Normally, select this position.

–10dB: If the volume levels to the center and/or rear

speakers are lower than the level to the main

speakers even though they are adjusted to

maximum.

The volume level to the main speakers are

decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker

output level balance properly.

PREPARATION

Note

The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR

SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT”

have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit.

English

m Changing selections

Refer to the display panel or the monitor screen when changing the selections.

When using the remote controller, the selector dial must be

set at “AMP/TUN”.

1 Turn on the power of this unit. (If necessary, turn on the

power of the monitor to display information.)

2 Select the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” by using

one of the following methods.

3 Use one of the buttons figured below to select the

desired position.

4 Follow the same procedure for “2. REAR SPEAKER”,

“3. MAIN SPEAKER”, “4. LFE/BASS OUT” and/or

“5. MAIN LEVEL”.

First select the function by following step 2, and then

select the proper position by following step 3.

Front panel

Remote controlFront panel

Remote control

STANDBY/ON

SELECT

DIR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DSP

Remote control

POWER

Changes.

PREPARATION

Front panel

LEVEL

SET

LEVEL

SET

SET MENU

AUDIO

SET MENU

AUDIO

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

VOLUME

MUTE

SLEEP

DIR DIR

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SELECT

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

POWER

STANDBY

AMP/TUN

Press once

or more.

Press once or

more.

Press once.

SELECT

DIR

Press once or

more.

1 Set the selector dial of the remote controller to

“AMP/TUN”.

Set to the “

∞

” position.

3 Select main speakers A or B.

* Both speakers A and B can be selected.

4 Turn on the power.

Set to the “0” position.

Set to the “OFF ( )”.

7 Press the TEST key on the remote controller to enter

the test mode.

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test

tone generator. After the adjustments, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker.

This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic

Surround decoder and the DTS decoder.

The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote controller.

VOLUME

–dB

STANDBY/ON

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

63 5

100

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

100

CLEAR

TEST

Front panel

Remote control

POWER

CONTINUED

Speaker balance adjustment

PREPARATION

SPEAKERS

OFF

BASS TREBLE

BALANCE

OFF

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

Front panel

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/ D

VCR

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

AMP/TUN

English

8 Turn up the volume.

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main

speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main

speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear

speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes

as shown below.

* The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor screen by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

* If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU

mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the

center channel test tone from the left and right main

speakers.

9 Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound

output level of the left main speaker and the right main

speaker are the same.

10 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker

and the rear speakers so that they become almost

the same as the main speakers.

How to adjust:

Pressing the or key adjusts the level to the

speaker (except the main speakers) currently

outputting the test tone.

* Pressing the key raises and the key lowers

the level.

* While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected

speaker.

If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test

tone by pressing the or key once or more so

that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the

display.

* While holding the or key pressed, the test

tone is fixed on the selected speaker.

* “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected,

“R SUR.” shows the right rear speaker, and “L SUR.”

shows the left rear speaker.

* The output level of the selected speaker can be

adjusted by the or key.

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

BALANCE

Main (L)

Main (R)

Center

Rear (L)

Rear (R)

SELECT

DIR

SELECT

DIR

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

TEST DOLBY SUR.

EFFECT LEVEL

CENTER 2dB

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

SET UP

RETURN

POWER

VOLUME

MUTE

SLEEP

DIR DIR

DISP

CODE SET

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SELECT

SUBT T E ANG E

CONTINUED

PREPARATION

11 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST

key once again to cancel the test tone.

Notes

●

Once you have completed these adjustments, you can

adjust the sound level on your audio system by using the

VOLUME control (or the VOLUME keys on the remote

controller) only.

●

If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use

their volume controls to obtain proper balance.

●

If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU

mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 10, the sound

output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.

This is because in this mode, the center sound is

automatically output from the left and right main speakers.

●

If there is insufficient sound output from the center and

rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker

output level by setting the function “5. MAIN LEVEL” in

the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position.

Remote control

Disappears

100

CLEAR

TEST

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

PREPARATION

English

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

When using the remote controller, the selector dial must be

set at “AMP/TUN”.

Set to the “

∞

” position.

2 Select main speakers A or B.

Front panel

* Both speakers A and B can be selected.

3 Turn on the power.

4 Select an input source.

(For video sources, turn on the TV/monitor.)

The selected source is shown on the display panel and

the monitor screen.

Name of the selected input source

To select the tape deck connected to this unit’s

TAPE/MD terminals or the source connected to this

unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals, use one

of the buttons figured below. (Refer to page 35 for

details.)

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel Remote control

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

Front panel

Remote control

POWER

BASIC OPERATION

Playing a source

SPEAKERS

OFF

CONTINUED

VOLUME

–dB

Front panel

EXT. DEC

HALL

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 2

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

AMP/TUN

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

BASIC OPERATION

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

5 The current input mode is also shown for a source that

inputs two or more types of signals to this unit.

To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button

on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently

selected source on the remote controller. (Refer to page 36

for details on switching the input mode.)

6 Play the source. (Refer to page 39 for details on

tuning.)

Adjust the output level.

8 Adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc.

(refer to page 38) and use the digital

sound field processor. (Refer to pages 43 to 45.)

Front panel

Remote control

Input mode

INPUT MODE

DVD/LD

MONO MOVIE

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

When you finish using this unit

Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel or the

STANDBY key on the remote controller to enter the standby

mode.

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY

English

To select the tape deck connected to this

unit’s TAPE/MD terminals or the source

connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals as the input

source.

Use one of the buttons figured below to make the

corresponding indicator illuminated on the display.

“TAPE MONITOR”: Lights up for a few seconds just

after you select the tape deck

connected to the TAPE/MD

terminals.

“EXT. DECODER”: Lights up when the source

connected to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals is

selected.

Note

The input source selected in this way has priority over any

other input source already selected. To select another input

source, cancel both of the sources connected to the TAPE/MD

and EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals.

To cancel both of the sources connected to the TAPE/MD

and EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals.

Use one of the buttons figured above to make neither “EXT.

DECODER” nor “TAPE/MD MONITOR” are illuminated on the

display.

Notes on input source selection

●

Note that selecting an input source means that the source

which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on

the rear panel is selected.

* To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX

terminals on the front panel, select “V-AUX”.

●

If you select a video input source without canceling the

source already selected in the way described on the left,

you will see the picture of the video input source and hear

the sound of the source already selected.

●

If a different audio source is selected with the input selector

keys on the remote controller while enjoying a video source,

the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard,

but the picture from the video source can still be seen.

●

When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the

state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the

same input source was last selected will be automatically

recalled.

●

If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit

playing back a source is not operating correctly, “INPUT

DATA ERR” appears on the display.

Front panel

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

Remote control

EXT. DEC

HALL

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 2

BASIC OPERATION

TAPE/MD

MONITOR

Press once or more.

TAPE/MD

MONITOR

This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that

send two or more types of signals to this unit.

The following three input modes are provided.

AUTO

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power of this unit.

In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the

following order of priority.

1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal

digital input signals (PCM)

2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

* For a DVD/LD source, if digital signals are input from both

of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal

from the COAXIAL terminal is selected.

DTS

In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is

selected even though other signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even

though digital signals are input at the same time.

Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals

instead of digital input signals.

Notes on input mode selection

●

The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with

function “12. TV/DBS INPUT” in the SET MENU mode.

This unit will be automatically set to the selected input mode

when the power is turned on.

●

Set the input mode to the AUTO mode to play a DVD/LD

source encoded with Dolby Digital.

●

Select the ANALOG mode to play a normal 2-channel

source with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program.

●

The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD

players in the following situation:

The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while

playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, then

disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for

a moment because the digital input signal was selected

again.

●

The input mode cannot be changed for PHONO, TUNER,

TAPE/MD, VCR and VIDEO AUX sources because only

analog signals are used.

●

The present input mode appears on the front display and

monitor screen when the input source is changed to

DVD/LD, CD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is changed.

The present input signal is also shown on the monitor

screen when the input mode is changed to AUTO, as shown

below.

* However, the present input signal will not be shown when

the input mode is switched during the speaker test mode.

Only AUTO will be displayed.

Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS

●

Select the DTS mode when playing an LD or CD source

encoded with DTS. (Red “dts” indicator is illuminated on

the display panel.) If the “AUTO” mode is selected, a

noise may be heard just after playback begins.

Do not play these sources in the ANALOG mode

because only background noise will be output from the

speakers.

●

This unit is automatically locked in the DTS decoding

mode when playing a CD or LD source encoded with

DTS in the AUTO mode to prevent background noise in

future operation. The red “dts” indicator will be flashing.

In this mode, no sound will be heard if a disc with normal

digital signals (PCM) is played from a CD or LD source.

To play back the disc normally, press the INPUT MODE

button on the front panel, or, the input selector key for the

current source on the remote controller.

BASIC OPERATION

m Switching the input mode for the CD, DVD/LD and TV/DBS sources

English

1 Select the source you want to record.

2 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up

to confirm the input source. (Refer to page 39 for

details on tuning.)

3 Begin recording to the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

or VCR connected to this unit.

4 If the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) is used for

recording, you can monitor the sound of recording.

To monitor the sound of recording, light up the

“TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator on the display by

pressing the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button

or TAPE/MD key.

Notes on recording

●

The VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, the

BASS EXTENSION button and the settings of DSP have

no effect on the material being recorded.

●

Turn off the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator when the

recording is finished by pressing the TAPE/MD MON/EXT.

DECODER button once or more. Also, do not make “EXT.

DECODER” appear on the display.

●

Composite video and S video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected

to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal,

you can record only a S video (or only a composite video)

signal on your VCR.

●

A source that is connected to this unit between optical or

coaxial digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to this unit.

●

A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded.

●

Please check the copyright laws in your country to record

from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of

If you play back a video source that uses scramble or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may

be a case that display information superimposed on the

picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those

signals.

Front panel

Remote control

/DTS

SURROUND

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD)

to tape (or MD)

m Recording the playing source to tape (or MD)

BASIC OPERATION

Front panel

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

Remote control

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 2

TAPE/MD

MONITOR

BASIC OPERATION

m Adjusting the BALANCE control

Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right

speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by

speaker location or listening room conditions.

Note

This control is effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

m Using the BASS EXTENSION

button

Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency

response at the main left and right channels while maintaining

overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing

the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used.

m Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE

controls

BASS : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter-

clockwise to decrease) the low frequency

response.

TREBLE : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter

clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response.

Note

These controls are effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

m Using the TONE BYPASS button

Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and

TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting

pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone

control circuitry can be used when this button is released

outward (OFF).

BASS TREBLE

OFF

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

BALANCE

OFF

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

Sound control

English

Tuning

BASIC OPERATION

1 Select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be

illuminated.

4 Tune to the desired station manually.

* Hold down the button to continue the tuning search.

1 Select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be

illuminated.

4 Press the “UP” side once to tune in to a higher

frequency.

Press the “DOWN” side once to tune in to a lower

frequency.

* Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at

the correct station.

* Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the

correct station because the signals are weak.

Quick automatic-search tuning (automatic tuning) is effective when the station signals are strong with no interference. However,

manual tuning can be used during less-than-ideal conditions.

Note

Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the

reception to monaural to increase the signal quality.

m Automatic tuning m Manual tuning

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

MAN’L MONO

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

MAN’L MONO

DOWN

TUNING

DOWN

TUNING

Turn the “AUTO”

indicator off.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

AUTO

Basic operation

BASIC OPERATION

1 Tune to a station.

(Refer to the previous page for the tuning procedure.)

2 Select a group (A – E) of preset stations.

4 Select a preset station number (1 to 8) where you want

to program the station before the “MEMORY” indicator

goes off from the display.

* In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8.

* You can program more stations to the preset station

numbers on other groups in the same way by selecting

other groups in step 2.

11 Select the group of preset stations.

22 Select the preset station number.

Notes

• A new setting can be programmed in place of the former

one.

• For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or

monaural) is stored along with the station frequency.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data

from being lost even if this unit is set to the standby mode or

the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the

power is cut due to a temporary power failure. If, however, the

power is cut for more than one week, the memory may be

deleted. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following

the Preset tuning steps.

m Manual preset tuning

This unit can store station frequencies selected by the tuning operation. With this function, you can recall any desired station only by

selecting the preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored.

To store stations

2, 11 3

MAN’L

AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes on and off

for about 5 seconds.

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

AUTO

0 20 100

STEREO

Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A1.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

Preset tuning

To recall a preset station

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

DISC SKIP

PRESET

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

MONO MOVIE

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

ON SCREEN

4, 22

2, 11

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SURROUND

Select “AMP/TUN”

English

2 Press and hold for more than 3 seconds

To tune to higher frequencies, press the “UP” side once.

To tune to lower frequencies, press the “DOWN” side once.

* If the TUNING button is not pressed, in a while, the

automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher

frequencies.

The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed. Received stations are programmed to

A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially.

* If more than 8 stations are received, they are also

programmed to the preset station numbers on other groups

(B, C, D and E) in that order.

If you want to store the first received station to the

desired preset station number.

If, for example, you want to store the first received station to

C5, select “C5” by using the A/B/C/D/E button and the preset

station number selector buttons after pressing the MEMORY

button in step 2. Then press the TUNING button. The first

received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ...

sequentially.

If stations are stored up to E8, the automatic preset tuning is

finished automatically.

When the automatic preset tuning is finished

The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.

Check the contents and the number of preset stations by

following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset

station” on page 40.

To recall a preset station

Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset

station” on page 40.

A recalled station is shown by the frequency on the display.

Notes

●

You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM

station manually by simply following the procedure of the

section “To store stations” on page 40.

●

If the number of received stations is not enough to be stored

up to E8, the search will be finished automatically after

searching all frequencies.

●

With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal

strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to

program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural

manually and program it by following the procedure of the

section “To store stations” on page 40.

m Automatic preset tuning

You can make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations. With this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and

stores FM stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual

preset tuning method on page 40.

To store stations

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

DOWN

TUNING

BASIC OPERATION

Flashes

MAN’L

AUTO FM

MEMORY

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

MEMORY

AUTO

0 20 100

STEREO

BASIC OPERATION

m Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below.

Example)

If you want to exchange the preset stations on E1 and A5 with

each other.

1 Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the

method of “To recall a preset station” on page 40).

3 Recall the preset station on A5 by following the same

method with step 1.

Shows the exchange of stations is completed.

Flashes.

EDIT

MEMORY

2, 4

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

MEMORY

0 20 100

EDIT

When the selector dial is set at a position other

than DSP:

* Do the next operation while the indicator is

illuminated. If the indicator goes off before you

do the next operation, press the DSP key

again.

English

Using digital sound field processor (DSP)

Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP)

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

MOV

THEATER 1

MONO MOVIE

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

INDEX

ON SCREEN

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand

and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your

listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend

on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments.

In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound

reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded

with DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined

operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic Surround or DTS.

This unit has 10 programs for digital sound field processing; 5 programs for Audio sources and 5 programs for Audio/Video sources.

In addition, some programs have two subprograms. All programs contain parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste.

For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 48 to 50.

2 When operating on the front panel:

If no program name is illuminated on

the display panel, press the EFFECT

button to turn on the digital sound field

processor so that a name of a DSP

program appears on the display panel

and the monitor screen.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

CONTINUED

EFFECT

BASIC OPERATION

POWER

STANDBY

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SURROUND

DSP

The indicator lights up for

about 3 seconds.

When the selector dial is set

at DSP:

Go on to the next step.

When operating on the remote controller:

1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “Playing a source” on pages 33 to 34.

POWER

STANDBY

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SURROUND

DSP

3 Select a program that is suitable for the source.

The name of the selected program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen.

●

djust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 46 and 47.)

●

You can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 55 to 59.)

Notes

●

Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected

at this time. So, when you select the same input source the next time, the same program will be automatically recalled.

●

If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround

sound effect.

●

When a monaural sound source is played with the program PRO LOGIC (Normal/Enhanced), a proper effect will not be

obtained. Moreover, sound may become unnatural depending on the settings of the speaker output modes (1. CENTER

SPEAKER to 4. LFE/BASS OUT) in the SET MENU mode.

●

When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is

considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels

may produce an unnatural effect.

●

When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used

and the EFFECT button also will not function.

DSP

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

MOVIE THEATER 1

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

Subprogram name Program name

Press once or more.

b) For the programs No. 1, 2 and 3 only, you can select

the desired subprogram by pressing the

corresponding DSP program selector key once or

more.

PROGRAM

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

VOLUME

MUTE

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

CODE SET

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller:

BASIC OPERATION

* Press “0” to select the program No. 10.

DSP

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

Program name

English

m To enjoy a video source encoded

with Dolby Pro Logic Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS

When you select the program No. 1, 2 or 3, and the input

signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic

Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the

input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby

Digital is automatically decoded.

When some program is selected and the input signal of the

source is encoded with DTS, DTS is automatically decoded.

The following indicators on the display panel show you what

sound processing is being made.

1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played

back and DTS is decoded.

2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with

DTS is played back and DTS is decoded.

3 Lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the

signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is

not in 2-channels.

4 Lights up when Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being

decoded

5 Lights up when Digital Sound Field Processor is turned

on.

The display panel or the monitor screen will show the selected

subprogram according to the type of the decoding.

Notes

●

Dolby Digital will not be decoded if the source that is not

encoded with Dolby Digital.

DTS will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded

with DTS.

●

If the input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital

are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is

similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals.

Note

If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS

decoded to another disc not encoded with DTS when the red

“dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected

disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator

flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding

mode.

To play back the disc normally, change the current DTS-

decoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector

key on the remote controller or the INPUT MODE button on

the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off.

m To cancel the effect sound

The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFCT ON/OFF key

on the remote controller make it simple to compare the normal

stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound.

To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound,

press the EFCT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press the

EFCT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time to

restore the effect sound.

Notes

●

If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with

Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, signals of all

channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers.

●

If the EFFECT button or the EFCT ON/OFF key is pressed to

turn effect sounds off when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded, it

may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally

depending on a source. In that case, press the EFFECT

button or the EFCT ON/OFF key to turn effect sounds ON, or

use input signals not encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS.

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

Front panel

Remote control

EFFECT

EFCT

ON/OFF

BASIC OPERATION

Speakers

CENTER

RIGHT SURROUND (R SUR.)

LEFT SURROUND (L SUR.)

SUBWOOFER (SWFR)

Preset value

Control range (dB)

MIN, –20 to +10

MIN, –20 to 0

Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and

subwoofer

You can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker

even if the output level is already set in “Speaker balance

adjustment” on pages 30 to 32.

CENTER

R SUR.

L SUR.

SWFR

(Center speaker output level)

(Right rear speaker output level)

(Left rear speaker output level)

(Subwoofer output level)

BASIC OPERATION

1 Select the speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust by using one of the following methods.

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller:

Press a button repeatedly until the name of the desired speaker(s) appears on the display.

2 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s).

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make adjustments on the other speaker(s).

English

Notes

●

If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU

mode is set in the “NONE” position, the sound output level

of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because

in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from

the left and right main speakers.

●

Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the

same in all the digital sound field programs.

●

The value of each speaker output level you set the last time

will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby

mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected for more than

one week, these values will be automatically changed to the

factory default settings.

BASIC OPERATION

LEVEL

ON/OFF

TITLE

LEVEL

ON/OFF

TITLE

SELECT

DIR

m Method of adjustment

SELECT

DIR

Press once

or more.

Press once

or more.

Press once

or more.

Press once.

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

VCR

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

LEVEL

SET

LEVEL

SET

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

DIR DIR

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SELECT

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

Select “AMP/TUN.”

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of

these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual

locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment.

Note

The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are

listening in. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments.

m Program No. 1 to 5: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources)

●

These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder.

●

Speaker output: main, center, rear

Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from

the center speaker(s).

●

Program No. 1 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing

the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).

Brief overview of digital sound field programs

BASIC OPERATION

FEATURE

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby

Digital decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces

sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby

Surround or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient

decoding process improves crosstalk and channel

separation and makes sound positioning smoother and

more precise.

Ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of

the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing

and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding

are precisely performed without altering the originally

designed sound orientation. The surround effects

produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from

the rear to the left and right and toward the screen.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

1 /DTS PRO LOGIC/Normal ()

SURROUND Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR/Normal ()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

PRO LOGIC/Enhanced

()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR/Enhanced

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

English

BASIC OPERATION

FEATURE

Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie

theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in

detail, giving both the video and the sound field

incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded

with Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale

movie productions) are ideal for use with this program.

Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest

sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a

broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence.

You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space

sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

and DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the

newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be

similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the

reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as

much as possible. The data of the sound field of an

opera house are used for the front presence side, so the

three dimensional feeling of the sound field is

emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the

screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert

hall on the rear surround side, powerful reverberations

are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure

movies, etc. with much presence.

This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track

film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound

field. The front presence side of the sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and

toward the screen, restraining echo effect of

conversations without losing clarity. For the surround

side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully

in a wide space at the rear of the sound field.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

2 MOVIE 70 mm Spectacle

THEATER 1 ()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL Spectacle

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Spectacle

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

70 mm Sci-Fi

()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL Sci-Fi

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Sci-Fi

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

3 MOVIE 70 mm Adventure

THEATER 2 ()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL Adventure

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Adventure

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

70 mm General

()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL General

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS General

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

●

Program No. 2 to 3 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby

Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).

m Program No. 6 to 10: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources)

●

When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )

Speaker output: main, rear

●

When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )

Speaker output: main, center, rear

●

When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )

Speaker output: main, center, rear

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

BASIC OPERATION

FEATURE

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and

highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy,

“immediate” sound.

This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will

experience a very dynamic or lively sound field.

This is a small, cozy jazz club with a low ceiling. The sound is

very close and intimate.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big

church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides.

This interior produces very long reverberations.

In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the

main speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience.

Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field.

PROGRAM

DISCO

ROCK CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

CHURCH

CONCERT HALL

No.

FEATURE

This program is designed specifically to enhance mono

source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the

sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly

forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the

overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old

mono movies, news broadcasts and dialog.

This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the

sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear

surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This

program is the most suitable for sports programs.

PROGRAM

MONO MOVIE

TV SPORTS

No.

●

For program No. 4 and 5 only, indicators light up as follows.

When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )

When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): (

)

When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

English

ADVANCED FEATURES

1. CENTER SPEAKER

2. REAR SPEAKER

3. MAIN SPEAKER

4. LFE/BASS OUT

5. MAIN LEVEL

6. DOLBY DGTL SET

LFE LEVEL

7. DOLBY DGTL SET

DYNAMIC RANGE

8. DTS SET

LFE LEVEL

19. CENTER DELAY

10. PARAMETER INI

11. MEMORY GUARD

12.TV/DBS INPUT

13. DIMMER

m Changes and adjustments

The following 13 functions maximize the performance of your system and increase the enjoyment of audio listening and video watching.

“SET MENU”mode

● Refer to the information in the display panel or monitor screen during operation. The monitor power must be turned on to display

information on the monitor.

● When using the remote controller, the selector dial must be set at “AMP/TUN” or “DSP”.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERSPHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

CINEMA DSP

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

1 To make changes, select the applicable function by using one of the following methods.

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller:

2 Select the desired position or edit parameter for the function by using the following keys.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change a setting or adjust for another function.

SET MENU

AUDIO

SET MENU

AUDIO

SELECT

DIR

SELECT

DIR

Press once or more.

Press once

or more.

Press once

or more.

Press once.

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

VCR

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

LEVEL

SET

LEVEL

SET

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

DIR DIR

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SELECT

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

Select “AMP/TUN” or “DSP”.

1. CENTER SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 5. MAIN LEVEL

2. REAR SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT

(Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system)

Refer to pages 27 to 29 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change, unless your

speaker system is modified.)

m Function description

6. DOLBY DGTL SET

LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel]

●

Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB

Preset value: 0 dB

●

This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is

decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded

with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other

channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio

of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5

for details about the LFE channel.)

ADVANCED FEATURES

●

Choices: MAX/STD/MIN

Preset position: MAX

●

This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is

decoded.

“Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level

and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie

originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide

dynamic range.

Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into

a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged.

Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not

always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of

your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase

the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in

a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of

source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost

among noises in your environment.

Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an

original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format

by “compressing” the data of sound.

MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital

is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide

dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds

like a movie theater.

Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can

listen to a source in a high output level in a room

specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.

STD (Standard):

In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital

is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of

the source suitable for low level listening.

MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than

in the STD position. Selecting this position will be

effective when you must listen to a source in an

extremely low level.

* In this position, it may happen that sound is output

faintly or not output normally depending on a

source. In that case, select the MAX or STD

position.

7. DOLBY DGTL SET

DYNAMIC RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range)

English

ADVANCED FEATURES

9. CENTER DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)]

●

Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step)

Preset value: 0 ms

●

This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or

DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source

encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center

channel signals.

Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main

channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel).

The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated.

In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to

your listening position may be shorter than the distance from

the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that

case, sounds from the left main, center and right main

speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by

delaying the sound from the center speaker.

10. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program)

You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program.

Note that some DSP programs have two subprograms; all

parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this

operation.

Initializing method

Use the remote controller for the operation.

A program number whose parameters has been changed is

marked with “

”. First press the DSP key, and then press a

DSP program selector key which corresponds to the program

number whose parameters you want to initialize. When

initialized, the “

” mark will disappear.

Note

When the selector dial of the remote controller is set at “DSP”,

simply press the corresponding DSP program selector key.

8. DTS SET

LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel]

●

Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB

Preset value: 0 dB

●

This adjustment is effective only when DTS is decoded and

the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS

contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other

channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio

of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5

for details about the LFE channel.)

12. TV/DBS INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the source connected to the

TV/DBS input terminals)

For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this

unit, you can designate the input mode that is automatically

selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always

selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the

last time is memorized and will not be changed even if

the power of this unit is switched off.

* Refer to page 36 for details about switching the input mode.

13. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel)

You can adjust the brightness of the display panel in five

degree increments.

11. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments)

If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters

and other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position,

they are locked and cannot be changed. The following

functions on this unit can be locked by this operation.

• DSP parameters

• Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode

• ON SCREEN display key

• LEVEL key

• TEST key

ADVANCED FEATURES

English

What is a sound field?

In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we

need to first understand what a sound field really is.

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are

the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition

to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell

where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the

room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is

highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more

absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains.

The elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two

distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the

sound field:

(1) Early Reflections.

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a

wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown

in the diagram on page 57 for any particular environment,

and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections

actually add clarity to the direct sound.

(2) Reverberations.

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation

taken together help us to determine the subjective size and

shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would

be able to create your own listening environment. The

acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert

hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability

to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done

with the DSP.

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to

the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are

preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create

the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to

use DSP programs without changing values of parameters,

however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound

fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust

those parameters. Even if the power cord of this unit is

disconnected from the AC outlet, your custom sound fields will

remain in the DSP’s memory for about one week. The

following page details how to make your own sound fields.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to

change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to

precisely create the effect you want. For the programs which

have subprograms, each subprogram has a set of parameters.

These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic

factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual

concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the

room, for example, affects the length of time between the

“early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced

reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE”

parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the

timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of

the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the

room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant

effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for

example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out

quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to

carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow

you to control these and many other factors that contribute to

your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially

“redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create

custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your

mood and music.

Refer to “Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters” on

pages 57 to 59 for a description of what each parameter does,

how it effects the sound, and its control range.

Creating your own sound fields

ADVANCED FEATURES

m Selecting and editing program parameters

This adjustment can be made only by using the remote controller

and watching the monitor screen or the display panel.

Note

Information on the monitor screen would be

easier to see than the display panel.

1 Set the selector dial of the remote controller to “DSP” or

“AMP/TUN”.

2 Turn on your monitor. If the currently selected type of

display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN

display key and select the full display.

3 Select the desired program (or subprogram) by following

the steps 2 and 3 of “Playing a source with an effect

of the digital sound field processor (DSP)” on pages

43 and 44.

The selected program name and its parameters will be

displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped

cursor points to the first parameter or subprogram name.

4 Select the parameter which you want to edit.

5 Change the value on the selected parameter to create

the effect you want.

“ ” increases the value of the selected parameter, and

“ ” decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both

cases you can hold the key down to quickly move to the

desired value.

The display will pause for a moment at the initial set value of

the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, the

mark at the head of the parameter name will disappear upon

reaching the initial set value of the parameter.)

DISP

INDEX

ON SCREEN

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

SELECT

DIR

SELECT

DIR

ADVANCED FEATURES

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

SLEEP

DIR DIR

DISP

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SELECT

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

4, 5

POWER

STANDBY

Notes

●

For details about parameters, refer to pages 57 to 59.

●

Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even

if power is lost due to a power failure or the power plug is

disconnected from the AC outlet for up to about one week,

after which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or

setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values

or conditions.

DSP or AMP/TUN

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

DSP

English

m Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters

Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

●

ROOM SIZE

How it Affects the Sound:

Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger

the value, the larger the simulated room will sound.

What it Does:

Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early

reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before

the subsequent, dense reverberation begins.

Control Range:

0.1 – 2.0

Standard setting is 1.0.

Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent

volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all

doubled).

P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size)

Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound

field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between

reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound

source.

S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size)

Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field.

The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field

becomes.

●

INIT. DELAY (Initial Delay)

How it Affects the Sound:

Changes the apparent distance from the source sound.

Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective

surface determines the delay between the direct sound and

the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the

sound source within the acoustic environment.

What it Does:

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first

reflection heard by the listener.

Control Range:

1 – 99 milliseconds

For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small

value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an

echo effect.

P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the

later the first reflection begins.

Control Range:

1 – 99 milliseconds

S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value,

the later the first reflection begins.

Control Range:

1 – 49 milliseconds

INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Small space

Small

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Large

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Large space

Level

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Early reflections

ADVANCED FEATURES

●

LIVENESS

How it Affects the Sound:

This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls

in the hall.

The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity

(decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent

wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective

surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the

early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room

with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay

rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you

adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness”

of the room.

What it Does:

Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay.

Control Range:

0 – 10.

LIVENESS (Presence Liveness)

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence

sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front

presence sound field becomes.

S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness)

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround

sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear

surround sound field becomes.

●

REV.TIME (Reverberation Time)

How it Affects the Sound:

The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily

on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This

parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the

acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

What it Does:

Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense,

subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz).

Control Range:

1.0 – 5.0 seconds.

The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be

between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2

and 3.

REV. TIME

60 dB

REV. TIME

60 dB

REV. TIME

60 dB

Level

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Dead Live

Level

Reverberations Reverberations Reverberations

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Early reflections

ADVANCED FEATURES

English

●

REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level)

This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control Range:

0 – 100%

●

S. DELAY (Surround Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the

later the surround sound field is generated.

Control Range:

When Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded:

15 – 30 milliseconds

When Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded:

0 – 15 milliseconds

When a program without Dolby Surround or DTS

encoded is used:

15 – 49 milliseconds

REV. LEVEL

Level

Direct sound

Time

ADVANCED FEATURES

1 Select the source using the INPUT SELECTOR and

start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the

source unit.

2 Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until the desired

SLEEP time appears on the display.

* “SLEEP time” is the time that elapses before this unit

is automatically turned into the standby mode.

Each time you press the SLEEP key, the SLEEP time

changes as follows.

After a while, the display returns to the original indication.

To cancel the SLEEP timer

Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears

on the display. (After a while, the display returns to the original

indication.)

Note

The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting this

unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on

the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote controller)

or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet.

SLEEP

Use the built-in SLEEP timer to automatically turn this unit into the standby mode after the time you set elapses. The SLEEP timer is

useful when you plan to fall asleep while this unit is playing back or recording a source. The SLEEP timer also automatically turns off

external units connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear of this unit. The SLEEP timer can only be set using the

remote controller.

To set the SLEEP time

120 90 60 30

SLEEP OFF

(The SLEEP timer is off.)

(Minutes)

Indicates the SLEEP time.

Flashes.

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR

SLEEP

Setting the SLEEP timer

ADVANCED FEATURES

1 Select the position for the component that you want to

control by turning the selector dial.

Note: Turn the selector dial unitl it stops with a click.

2 Press an operation key.

Note: Press a key with the remote controller aimed at the

front panel.

English

The remote controller is designed to control the most commonly used functions. If you have other Yamaha audio and video

components with remote control capability, this remote controller will also control various functions of them.

In addition, this remote controller can control other manufacturers’ audio and video components by programming the remote

controller with the codes for other manufacturers.

REMOTE CONTROLLER

Basic operation

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

POWER

STANDBY

Selected position

is shown.

The indicator will flash

when a key is pressed.

Components which can be controlled

The selector dial can be turned to select nine positions. The components which can be controlled with the remote controller differs

depending on the selected position. Refer to the diagram below to know what components can be controlled for each position.

AMP/TUN

This unit can be controlled. Normally set to this position

TAPE/MD

Tape decks and MD recorders can be controlled.

* Keys are originally preset to control Yamaha tape decks. To control a Yamaha MD

recorder, enter the code for Yamaha MD recorders.

CD players can be controlled.

* Keys are originally preset to control Yamaha CD players.

DSP

This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly.

DVD/LD

DVD players and LD players can be controlled.

* To control the Yamaha model DVD-1000 or DVD-S700, enter the code number “4490”.

DVD MENU

DVD players can be controlled.

* A code for a DVD player cannot be entered in this position.

VCR

VCRs can be controlled.

CBL/DBS

Cable TVs or DBS tuners can be controlled.

TVs can be controlled.

Notes

●

You can program the remote controller with the codes for

other manufactures for all positions (except AMP/TUN and

DSP) respectively.

For example, if your CD player is not a Yamaha model,

enter the code for the manufacture of the CD player when

the CD position is selected. You can control your CD player

with the remote controller when the CD position is selected.

You can enter one code for one position.

Refer to page 67 for details about entering codes.

●

Some Yamaha CD players and tape decks cannot be

controlled with the default codes. To control such a model,

enter the code for the model in the corresponding position.

●

For the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions:

If you enter a code for a DVD player in the DVD/LD position,

the keys in the DVD MENU position become also available

for controlling the DVD player. You cannot enter a code for

a DVD player when the DVD MENU is selected.

●

You can enter the code for your second (or third) VCR in the

CBL/DBS position if you do not use a cable TV, DBS tuner, etc.

You can also enter the code for your second (or third) VCR in

the DVD MENU position if you do not use a DVD player. In this

case, however, you must enter a code for an LD player in the

DVD/LD position even if you do not use an LD player.

Refer to page 67 for details.

m AMP/TUN

* The keys drawn in a light tone do not function.

Key name and function

The key functions differ depending on the position selected by the selector dial as shown below.

Note

TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have entered the

code for your TV.

1 POWER

Press this key to turn on the power of this unit.

2 Input selector keys

Press a key to select the input source.

3 EXT. DEC.

Press this key to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function

takes priority over the input selector key setting. “EXT.

DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel.

The source selected with the input selector keys becomes the

current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated

on the display panel.

* If the DSP key (

5) is pressed, you can select the HALL

program by pressing this key while the indicator (

C) is

illuminated.

4 A/B/C/D/E

Press this key to select a group of preset stations.

5 DSP

Press this key. While the indicator (

C) is illuminated for about

three seconds, select a DSP program using the keys

(

2, 3, D). No DSP program can be selected after the

indicator goes off.

6 PRESET +/–

+: Press this key to select the next preset station number.

–: Press this key to select the previous preset station

number.

7 VOLUME (up)/ (down)

Press these keys to increase or decrease the volume.

8 MUTE

Press this key to mute the volume. The volume can be

returned to the original level by pressing any remote controller

key which controls this unit.

The indicator on the VOLUME control flashes during the mute

mode.

9 SLEEP

Press this key to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and

set the SLEEP time. (Refer to page 60.)

0 / / /

The (up) and (down) keys select the DSP parameters,

or select speaker(s) or functions according to the mode

selected by the LEVEL or SET MENU key. The and

keys adjust or make changes in the selected parameter,

speaker(s) or function.

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

(TV VOLUME)

REMOTE CONTROLLER

The functions of all keys are the same with the AMP/TUN

position except the DSP program selector keys figured on

the left.

DSP program selector keys

Press a key corresponding to the DSP program you want to

select. The program is directly selected.

Note: Press “0” to select the program No. 10.

English

REMOTE CONTROLLER

A LEVEL

This key is used to adjust the output level of the center

speaker, rear speakers and subwoofer. First, press this key.

Then select the speaker(s) by pressing this key repeatedly or

by using the or key (

0). The name will be illuminated

on the display. Then press the or key (

0) to change

the output level.

B STANDBY

Press this key to set this unit in the standby mode.

C Indicator

This indicator flashes when a key is pressed on the remote

controller. (Transmitting infrared signals.)

D CHURCH

If the DSP key (

5) is pressed, you can select the CHURCH

program by pressing this key while the indicator (

C) is

illuminated.

E TEST

This key is used when adjusting the speaker balance. (Refer to

pages 30 to 32.)

F EFCT ON/OFF

Press this key to turn on/off the digital sound field processor,

which includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby

Digital decoder and DTS decoder.

G ON SCREEN

Press this key to change the type of display on the monitor

screen. Three types of displays are available.

Each time the key is pressed, the information can be changed

to a full, simple and no display.

H SET MENU

Press this key to turn the unit into the SET MENU mode.

Select a function by pressing this key repeatedly or by using

the or key (

0). The function name will be illuminated

on the display. Then press the or key (

0) to adjust or

make settings in the function.

100

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

DSP program

selector keys

m DSP

The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. For the keys which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 62. For details,

refer to the instruction manual for each of your components.

m TAPE/MD

Note

TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have entered the

code for your TV.

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

INPUT

(TV VOLUME)

For tape decks

POWER

This key turns on this unit when the default code is used.

If another code is entered and your tape deck’s remote

controller has a power key, this key will turn on the tape deck.

2 REC/PAUSE

Press this key to set the tape deck in the recording pause

mode.

3 DIR A

Press this key to select the playing direction of DECK A.

4 PLAY

Press this key to play a tape.

5 REWIND

Press this key to rewind a tape.

7 DECK A/B

Press this key to select A or B on a double cassette tape deck.

9 DIR B

Press this key to select the playing direction of DECK B.

0 STOP

Press this key to stop a tape.

A FAST FORWARD

Press this key to fast forward a tape.

For MD recorders

Enter the proper code for your MD recorder.

1 POWER

This key turns on this unit if a code for a Yamaha MD recorder

is entered. If another manufactuer’s code is entered and your

MD recorder’s remote controller has a power key, this key will

turn on the MD recorder.

2 REC/PAUSE

3 SKIP

4 PLAY

5 BACKWARD

6 DISPLAY

8 PAUSE

9 SKIP

0 STOP

A FAST FORWARD

REMOTE CONTROLLER

English

The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. For the keys which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 62. For details,

refer to the instruction manual for each of your components.

m DVD/LD

Note

TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if

you have entered the code for your TV.

Note

TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if

you have entered the code for your TV.

m DVD MENU

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

SKIP/SEARCH

PLAY

SUBTITLE (DVD)/

BACKWARD (LD)

SUBTITLE

ON/OFF (DVD)

DISC SKIP

INPUT

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

(TV INPUT)

PAUSE

STOP

ANGLE (DVD)

AUDIO (DVD)

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

+10

MENU LEFT

MENU SELECT

SET UP

TITLE

DISC SKIP

Numeric

keys

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

TITLE/INDEX

MENU RIGHT

(TV INPUT)

MENU UP

MENU DOWN

CLEAR

RETURN

m CD

Note

TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have entered the

code for your TV.

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

INPUT

(TV VOLUME)

(TV INPUT)

1 POWER

This key turns on this unit when the

default code is used. If another code

is entered and your CD player’s

remote controller has a power key,

this key will turn on the CD player.

2 DISC SKIP

Press these keys to skip to the next

or previous CD.

3 , SKIP

Press to skip to the beginning of

the next track.

Press to skip to the beginning of

the current or previous track.

4 PLAY

Press this key to play a CD.

5 BACKWARD

Press this key to reverse playback

rapidly.

6 PAUSE

Press this key to pause playback.

This key functions as PAUSE/STOP

for operating Yamaha CD players

under default settings.

7 STOP

Press this key to stop playback.

This key functions as PAUSE/STOP

for operating Yamaha CD players

under default settings.

8 FAST FORWARD

Press this key to advance playback

rapidly.

(*1)

(*1): For a DVD player:

This key turns on this unit when

the default code is used.

For an CD player:

This key turns on this unit if a

code for a Yamaha LD player is

entered.

REMOTE CONTROLLER

The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. For the keys which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 62. For details,

refer to the instruction manual for each of your components.

m VCR m TV

Note

You can control your VCR if you have entered the code for it.

Note

TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have

entered the code for your TV.

Note

TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you

have entered the code for your TV.

m CBL/DBS

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

CHANNEL

ENTER

VCR REC (*1)

PLAY

REWIND

CHANNEL

+(UP)/–(DOWN)

CHANNEL

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

(TV INPUT)

PAUSE

STOP

FAST

FORWARD

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

TV POWER

TV MUTE

TV SLEEP

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

+(UP)/–(DOWN)

CHANNEL

TV VOLUME

DISPLAY

TV EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV INPUT

(VCR)

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

MENU LEFT

CHANNEL

ENTER

MENU SELECT

CHANNEL

+(UP)/–(DOWN)

CHANNEL

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

+100

(TV INPUT)

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

RECALL

MENU DOWN

REMOTE CONTROLLER

(*1) Press this key twice to start recording.

English

Entering manufacturer codes

If you have a component which is not a Yamaha model, you can enter the code for the manufacturer of the component in the

corresponding position of the selector dial. By doing so, you can control the component with the remote controller.

Refer to the code list at the end of this manual for the code numbers you need.

Notes

● Some Yamaha CD players and tape decks cannot be controlled with the default codes. To control such a model, enter the code

for the model in the corresponding position.

● If there is no code applicable for your component in the code list, you must use the remote controller provided for the component.

1 Set the selector dial to the position for controlling the

component. (For example, set to “VCR” for a VCR.)

2 Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the

same time and hold them until the indicator flashes

twice.

3 Use the numeric keys to enter the four-digit

manufacturer code for the component to be used.

Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.

* If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and enter

the code again.

4 Try operating the component with the remote controller

to check the code entering is successful.

Note

If the component cannot be controlled, enter another code for

the same manufacturer.

Entering a code

POWER

STANDBY

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SURROUND

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

Entering a code for a second (or third) VCR

You can use the CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position, or both of

them to control a second (and/or third) VCR if you do not use a

cable TV, DBS tuner, DVD player etc.

If you will use the DVD MENU position for a second (or third)

VCR, you must enter the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD

position.

1 Set the selector dial to the CBL/DBS or DVD MENU

position.

2 Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the

same time and hold them until the indicator flashes

twice.

3 Press the MUTE key.

4 Use the numeric keys to enter the four-digit

manufacturer code for the second (or third) VCR. Make

sure that the indicator flashes twice.

* If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 4 and enter the

code again.

5 Try operating the component with the remote controller

to check the code entering is successful.

Note

If the component cannot be controlled, enter another code for

the same manufacturer.

POWER

STANDBY

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SURROUND

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

REMOTE CONTROLLER

Restoring the default codes

1 Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the

same time and hold them until the indicator flashes

twice.

2 Enter the code number “9987”.

* Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.

1 Set the selector dial to the position for which you want to

restore the default code.

2 Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the

same time and hold them until the indicator flashes

twice.

3 Enter the code number “9999”.

* Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.

To restore the default codes for the all

positions.

To restore the default code for each

position

Default codes

The following codes are preset as the default code.

<U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models><Australia model>

We recommend that you write all code numbers you have entered on the “Quick Reference Card”.

Position Component Code

TV TV 0047

CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2566

VCR VCR 3060

DVD/LD DVD player 4545 YAMAHA

CD CD player 6187 YAMAHA

TAPE/MD Tape deck 8524 YAMAHA

Position Component Code

TV TV 0037

CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2455

VCR VCR 3072

DVD/LD DVD player 4545 YAMAHA

CD CD player 6187 YAMAHA

TAPE/MD Tape deck 8524 YAMAHA

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

A/B/C/D/E

100

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

POWER

STANDBY

Flashes

twice.

POWER

STANDBY

TAPE/MD

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SURROUND

REMOTE CONTROLLER

English

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the

instruction below does not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

Problem

The unit fails to turn on when the

STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns

into the standby mode suddenly soon after

the power is turned on.

This unit does not work normally.

No sound or no picture.

No picture

The sound suddenly goes off.

Only one side speaker outputs the sound.

No sound from the effect speakers.

No sound from the center speaker.

Poor bass reproduction.

Sound “hums”.

The volume level is low while playing a

record.

The volume level cannot be increased, or

sound is distorted.

Cause

Power cord is not plugged in or is not

completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the

rear panel is not set to either end.

There is an influence of strong external

noise (lightning, excessive static electricity,

etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while

using this unit.

Incorrect output cord connections.

Appropriate input source is not selected.

Speaker connections are not secure.

Digital signals other than PCM audio and

Dolby Digital (or DTS) encoded signals

which this unit cannot reproduce are input to

this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc.

There is no S video terminal connection

between this unit and the TV, though S

video signals are input to this unit.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of short circuit etc.

The SLEEP timer came on.

Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control.

Incorrect cord connections.

The EFFECT button is set off.

A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding

program is being used with material not

encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS).

The function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the

SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE” position.

One of the DSP programs No. 6 to No. 10 is

selected when the input signal of source is

2-channel stereo (analog/PCM).

The input signals of source encoded with

Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center

channel signals.

The function “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET

MENU mode is set in the SW or BOTH

position, though your system does not

include a subwoofer.

Output mode selection for each channel

(MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper.

Incorrect cord connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the TAPE/MD

OUT terminals of this unit is turned off.

What to Do

Firmly plug in the power cord.

Set the switch to either end when this unit is

in the standby mode.

Turn this unit into the standby mode and

disconnect the AC power cord from the AC

outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed,

connect the power and operate this unit

again.

Connect the cords properly. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Select the appropriate input source with the

INPUT SELECTOR or the TAPE/MD

MON/EXT. DECODER button.

Secure the connections.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT

terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal.

Turn this unit into the standby mode, and

then turn on to reset the protection circuit.

Cancel the SLEEP timer function.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Connect the cords properly. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Press the EFFECT button to turn it on.

Use a different sound field program.

Select the appropriate position.

Select another program.

Refer to the instructions for the source

currently played.

Select the MAIN position.

Make output mode selections suitable for

your speaker system.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cords may be defective.

Make the GND connection between the

turntable and this unit.

The player should be connected to the unit

through the MC head amplifier.

Turn on the power to the component.

General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The remote controller does not work.

The remote controller does not function

properly.

This unit or another component cannot be

controlled with the remote controller.

Cause

The batteries of this remote controller are

weak.

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type

of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote

control sensor of the main unit.

The selector dial of the remote controller is

not set at the proper position.

The code for controlling the component is not

preset to the remote controller.

What to Do

Replace the batteries with new ones.

The remote controller will function from a

maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30

degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Change position of the main unit.

Set the selector dial to the proper position.

Enter the code for controlling the component

in the corresponding position of the remote

controller.

Remote controller

Problem

DSP parameters and some other settings

on this unit cannot be changed.

“INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display

and no sound is heard.

The sound field cannot be recorded.

This unit does not operate properly.

A source cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to this unit.

Noise from nearby TV or tuner.

The sound is degraded when listening with

the headphones connected to the compact

disc player or tape deck that is connected

with this unit.

Cause

The function “11. MEMORY GUARD” in the

SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position.

A nonstandardized source is played back, or

the unit playing back a source is

misoperating.

It is not possible to record the sound field on

a tape deck connected to this unit’s

TAPE/MD OUT terminals.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (lightning,

excessive static electricity, etc.) or power

supply with low voltage.

The source unit is connected to this unit

between digital terminals only.

This unit is too close to the affected

equipment.

This unit is in the standby mode.

What to Do

Set to the “OFF” position.

Check the source, or turn off the unit playing

back the source and then turn on again.

Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC

outlet, and then plug in again after about one

minute.

Make additional connection between analog

terminals.

Move the unit further away from the affected

equipment.

Turn the power to this unit on.

English

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

A loud hissing noise is heard when you

play back a source encoded with DTS.

A percussive noise is heard when you

begin playing back a source encoded with

DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source encoded with DTS, even though the

“AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected

on this unit.

No sound is heard when you play back an

MD onto which you have recorded a

source encoded with DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

DAT onto which you have recorded a

source encoded with DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source (CD etc.) even though the currently

selected input mode is “AUTO”.

Problem

FM stereo reception is noisy.

There is distortion and clear reception

cannot be obtained even with a good

FM antenna.

A desired station cannot be tuned in

with the automatic tuning method.

Previously preset stations can no

longer be tuned in.

A desired station cannot be tuned in

with the automatic tuning method.

There are continuous crackling and

hissing noises.

There are buzzing and whining noises

(especially in the evening).

Cause

The player which plays back the source is

not connected to a digital audio signal input

terminal of this unit.

The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on

this unit.

If the “AUTO” input mode is selected,

depending on some sources, there may be a

case that a noise is heard while this unit is

identifying the format of input signal.

The DTS decoder built into this unit does not

function because the player has a digital

volume control and it is set at a position

other than “maximum”, “neutral” or

“ineffective”.

A source encoded with DTS cannot be

recorded onto an MD.

Depending on a DAT deck, a source

encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto

a DAT.

In the “AUTO” mode, DTS-decoding mode

cannot be changed to the normal (PCM)

digital signal input mode automatically.

Cause

Because of the characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts, this is limited to cases where

the transmitter is too far away or the

antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

This unit has been unplugged for a long

period.

Weak signal or loose antenna connections.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent

lamps, motors, thermostats and other

electrical equipment.

A television set is being used nearby.

What to Do

The player must be connected to a digital

audio signal input terminal of this unit besides

analog audio signal terminal connections.

Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn

on the DTS decoder built into this unit.

Set the input mode of the currently selected

input source to “DTS”.

Set the player’s digital volume control at the

maximum, neutral or ineffective position.

Press the INPUT MODE button on the front

panel or the input selector button (for the

currently selected source) on the remote

controller so that “PCM” appears on the

monitor screen.

What to Do

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high quality directional FM

antenna.

Set the TUNING MODE button to the manual

tuning mode.

Adjust antenna placement to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high quality directional FM antenna.

Repeat the presetting procedure.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and rotate it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat but it is difficult to

eliminate all the noises.

Relocate this unit away from the TV.

When playing back a source encoded with DTS:

Tuner

Notes

• It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be

connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a

D-to-A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard.

• If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the

display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode

to prevent a noise from being output.

• A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a

source encoded with DTS cannot be played back.

The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback).

FMAM

Although you make the operation for

recalling a preset station, the station

cannot be tuned in, or a station other than

the preset one is tuned in.

Some memory of the preset stations was

modified because the setting of the

FREQUENCY STEP switch was changed

after storing stations.

Repeat storing stations by following the

preset tuning procedure.

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel

(Power Amp. Section)

(When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms

................................................ 85W+85W

1 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms

............................................ 100W+100W

CENTER

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms

.......................................................... 85W

1 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms............ 100W

REAR L/R

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms

.................................................85W+85W

1 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms

.............................................100W+100W

Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General

models only]

1 kHz, 10% THD

, 8 ohms

(When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R................................125W+125W

CENTER.............................................125W

REAR L/R...............................125W+125W

Dynamic Power Per Channel

(by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method)

MAIN L/R (8 ohms/6 ohms/4 ohms/2 ohms)

(When both channels are driven)

..................................115W/140W/170W/200W

Dynamic Headroom

[U.S.A. and Canada models only]

MAIN L/R (8 ohms) .......................... 1.31 dB

DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel

[Europe, U.K. and Singapore models only]

MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms)

(When both channels are driven) ..... 130W

IEC Power

[Europe, U.K. and Singapore models only]

MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms)

(When both channels are driven) ....... 95W

Power Band Width

8 ohms, 40W, 0.09% THD

(When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R .........................10 Hz to 50 kHz

Damping Factor (SPEAKER A)

MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms)

..................................................... 80 or more

Input Sensitivity/Impedance

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR

/VIDEO AUX ................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms

PHONO MM......................2.5 mV/47 k-ohms

Maximum Input Signal

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR

/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON)

(1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................... 2.2V or more

PHONO MM (1 kHz, 0.04% THD)

............................................ 110 mV or more

Output Level/Impedance

REC OUT....................... 150 mV/1.0 k-ohms

PRE OUT............................ 2.6V/1.1 k-ohms

SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL)

............................................ 4.0V/1.2 k-ohms

Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

Output Level

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR

/VIDEO AUX Input: 1 kHz,

150 mV, RL=8 ohms ........................ 0.55V

Impedance .................................... 390 ohms

Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR

/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT

........................................................ 0±0.5 dB

RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO MM ....................................0±0.5 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR/VIDEO

AUX to MAIN SP OUT, 40W/8 ohms

.............................................. 0.025% or less

PHONO MM to REC OUT, 1V

................................................ 0.02% or less

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR/VIDEO

AUX to SP OUT (Input Shorted 150 mV)

(EFFECT OFF) ...................... 96 dB or more

PHONO MM to REC OUT

(Input Shorted 5 mV)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models] .................................86 dB or more

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models] .................................82 dB or more

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

MAIN L/R SP OUT ................. 170 µV or less

Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB, EFFECT

OFF)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR/VIDEO

AUX Input 5.1 k-ohms Shorted

1 kHz/10 kHz

........................................ 60/45 dB or more

PHONO MM Input Shorted

1 kHz/10 kHz

.........................................60/55 dB or more

Tone Control Characteristics

Bass

Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB (50 Hz)

Turnover frequency ........................ 350 Hz

Treble

Boost/Cut ......................... ±10 dB (20 kHz)

Turnover frequency ....................... 3.5 kHz

Bass Extension (MAIN L/R) .......+6 dB (50 Hz)

Filter Characteristics

MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R

(MAIN, CENTER, REAR SP: SMALL)

(H.P.F.) .......................fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct.

SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.)

.................................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct.

Gain Tracking Error (0 to –60 dB)

MAIN L/R ....................................3 dB or less

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Type

[U.S.A. and Canada models]................NTSC

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models] .................................................. PAL

[China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL

Video Signal Level ................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

S-Video Signal Level

Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

Maximum Input Level ........... 1.5 Vp-p or more

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............... 50 dB or more

Monitor Out Frequency Response

..................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

..........................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Europe, U.K., Australia, China, Singapore

and General models] ........87.5 to 108.0 MHz

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms,

100% mod., 1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models only]

Mono.................................1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

Stereo................................23 µV (38.5 dBf)

Usable Sensitivity (75 ohms)

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models only]

DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) .....................0.9 µV

DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB).....................28 µV

Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models only]..........................................75 dB

Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300

kHz)

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models only] .........................................55 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(IHF) Mono/Stereo

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models]..........................................81/75 dB

(DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models]..........................................75/69 dB

English

SPECIFICATIONS

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) ...............0.1/0.2%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz).......................48 dB

Frequency Response

20 Hz to 15 kHz..................................0±1 dB

Output Level (100% mod., 1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]

...........................................................550 mV

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models (40 kHz Dev.)] ......................550 mV

AM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]

........................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore

models] ...............................531 to 1,611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity..............................300 µV/m

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ..............................52 dB

Output Level (30% mod., 1 kHz) .........150 mV

GENERAL

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

............................................. AC 120V/60 Hz

[Europe, U.K. and Singapore models]

............................................. AC 230V/50 Hz

[Australia model] .................. AC 240V/50 Hz

[China and General models]

.................. AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] ..................................... 310W

[Europe, U.K., Australia, China, Singapore

and General models] ............................350W

[Canada model]........................350W/440 VA

Maximum Power Consumption

[General model only] ...........................690W

AC Outlets

2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

[U.S.A., Europe, Canada, China, Singapore

and General models] ....... 100W max. total

1 SWITCHED OUTLET

[U.K. and Australia models] ..... 100W max.

Dimensions (W x H x D)

........................................ 435 x 151 x 391 mm

(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 15-3/8”)

Weight ......................... 13.0 kg (28 lbs. 10 oz)

Accessories..........................Remote controller

Batteries

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

Antenna adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

* Specifications are subject to change without

notice.

SETUP CODES FOR TV

Manufacturer Code

A-Mark 0003

AOC 0030, 0019, 0003, 0052, 0185

Abex 0032

Acura 0009

Admiral 0093

Adventura 0046

Adyson 0032

Aiko 0092

Akai 0030, 0208

Akura 0264

Alaron 0179, 0216

Alba 0009, 0037

Ambassador 0177

Amstrad 0009, 0171, 0177

Anam 0180, 0004, 0009, 0068

Anam National 0161

Anitech 0009, 0068

Arcam 0216

Archer 0003

Audinac 0391

Audiosonic 0037, 0109

Audiovox 0451, 0180, 0003, 0092

BPL 0282

Basic Line 0009

Baur 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554

Baysonic 0180

Belcor 0019

Bell & Howell 0154, 0016

Beon 0037

Blaupunkt 0535, 0554

Blue Star 0282

Bradford 0180

Brandt 0109

Britannia 0216

Brockwood 0019

Broksonic 0236, 0463, 0003, 0426

Bush 0282, 0009, 0037

CCE 0037

CS Electronics 0216

CXC 0180

Candle 0030, 0056, 0046, 0186

Carnivale 0030

Carver 0054, 0170

Cascade 0009

Cathay 0037

Celebrity 0000

Centurion 0037

Cimline 0009

Cineral 0451, 0092

Citizen 0060, 0030, 0056, 0039,

0046, 0092, 0186, 0280

Clairtone 0185

Clarivox 0037

Concerto 0056

Contec 0180, 0009, 0185, 0216

Craig 0180, 0161

Crosley 0054

Crown 0180, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0418

Curtis Mathes 0047, 0054, 0154, 0051,

0451, 0093, 0060, 0030,

0145, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0166

Daewoo 0451, 0019, 0039, 0009,

0037, 0066, 0092

Dansai 0037

Dayton 0009

Daytron 0019

De Graaf 0208

Decca 0037

Denon 0145

Dixi 0004, 0009, 0037

Dumont 0017, 0019

Ectec 0391

Electroband 0000, 0185

Elin 0037

Elta 0009

Emerson 0154, 0236, 0463, 0180,

0282, 0178, 0019, 0179,

0039, 0177, 0185, 0280

Envision 0030

Erres 0037

Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0287, 0560

Fidelity 0216

Finlandia 0208

Finlux 0179, 0037

Firstline 0009, 0216

Fisher 0154, 0159, 0208

Formenti 0037

Frontech 0264

Fujitsu 0179

Funai 0180, 0179, 0171, 0264

Futuretech 0180

GE 0047, 0051, 0451, 0093,

0282, 0178, 0021, 0135

GEC 0037

Geloso 0009

Gibralter 0017, 0030, 0019

GoldStar 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056,

0001, 0002, 0032, 0037, 0109

Goodmans 0179, 0037

Gradiente 0053, 0056, 0170

Granada 0037, 0208, 0339, 0502

Grandin 0282

Grundig 0037, 0535, 0554

Grunpy 0180, 0179

HCM 0282, 0009

Hallmark 0178

Hanseatic 0037

Harley Davidson 0179

Harvard 0180, 0068

Hinari 0179, 0009, 0037, 0283

Hisawa 0282

Hitachi 0145, 0056, 0032,

0109, 0151, 0576

Huanyu 0216

Hypson 0282, 0037, 0264

ICE 0264

ITT 0283

Imperial 0418

Indiana 0037

Infinity 0054

Inteq 0017

Interbuy 0068

Interfunk 0037, 0512

Intervision 0037, 0068, 0264

JBL 0054

JCB 0000

JEC 0502

JVC 0053, 0069, 0160

Janeil 0046

KEC 0180

KTV 0180, 0030, 0039, 0185, 0280

Kaisui 0282, 0009, 0216

Kamp 0216

Kawasho 0216

Kaypani 0052

Kendo 0037

Kenwood 0030, 0019

Kingsley 0216

Kloss 0046

Korpel 0037

Koyoda 0009

LG 0056

LXI 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178

Leyco 0037, 0264

Liesenk & Tter 0037

Lloytron 0032

Loewe 0512

Logik 0016, 0001

Luxman 0056

M Electronic 0009, 0037, 0068,

0109, 0287

MEI 0185

MGA 0150, 0030, 0178, 0019

MTC 0060, 0030, 0019, 0056,

0185, 0216, 0512

Magnavox 0054, 0030, 0179,

0186, 0187

Majestic 0016

Manesth 0264

Marantz 0054, 0030, 0037

Mark 0037

Matsui 0009, 0035, 0037, 0177, 0208

Matsushita 0250

Mediator 0037

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES

LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS

For U.S.A. and Canada models

Modèles pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada

Megatron 0178, 0145, 0003

Memorex 0154, 0250, 0150, 0178,

0056, 0016, 0009

Metz 0535

Midland 0047, 0017, 0051,

0039, 0032, 0135

Minerva 0535, 0554

Minutz 0021

Mitsubishi 0093, 0150, 0178,

0019, 0512, 0535

Mivar 0216

Motorola 0093

Multitech 0180, 0009, 0216

NAD 0156, 0178, 0166

NEC 0030, 0019, 0056, 0170

NEI 0037

NTC 0092

Neckermann 0037, 0554

Nesco 0179

Nikkai 0032, 0035, 0037, 0216, 0264

Nikko 0030, 0178, 0092

Nisato 0391

Nordmende 0109, 0287, 0560

Noshi 0018

Onwa 0180

Optimus 0154, 0250, 0166

Optonica 0093, 0165

Orion 0236, 0463, 0179, 0037, 0177

Osaki 0032, 0264

Osume 0032

Otto Versand 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554

Palladium 0418

Panama 0264

Panasonic 0051, 0250, 0226

Pathe Cinema 0216

Pausa 0009

Penney 0047, 0156, 0051, 0060, 0030,

0178, 0021, 0019, 0018, 0056,

0039, 0002, 0003,

0032, 0135, 0149

Phase 0032

Philco 0054, 0463, 0030, 0145, 0019

Philips 0054, 0037, 0554

Phonola 0037

Pilot 0030, 0019, 0039

Pioneer 0109, 0166, 0287

Portland 0019, 0039, 0092

Prism 0051

Profex 0009

Proscan 0047

Protech 0009, 0037, 0264, 0418

Proton 0178, 0003, 0052

Pulsar 0017, 0019

Quasar 0051, 0250, 0165

Quelle 0037, 0252, 0512, 0535, 0554

R-Line 0037

RCA 0047, 0051, 0093, 0019,

0018, 0090, 0135

Radio Shack 0047, 0154, 0165, 0180,

0030, 0178, 0019, 0056,

0039, 0032

Radiola 0037

Realistic 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030,

0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032

Revox 0037

Rex 0264

Rhapsody 0185, 0216

Roadstar 0009, 0264, 0418

Runco 0017, 0030

SBR 0037

SEG 0264

SEI 0177

SSS 0180, 0019

Saba 0109, 0287

Saisho 0009, 0177, 0264

Sampo 0030, 0039, 0032, 0052

Samsung 0060, 0030, 0178, 0019,

0056, 0039, 0009, 0032,

0037, 0090, 0264, 0427

Samsux 0039

Sandra 0216

Sansei 0451

Sansui 0463

Sanyo 0154, 0159, 0208, 0339

Schneider 0037

Scimitsu 0019

Scotch 0178

Scott 0236, 0180, 0178, 0019, 0179

Sears 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178,

0179, 0056, 0149, 0159, 0171

Semivox 0180

Semp 0156

Sentra 0035, 0283

Sharp 0093, 0165, 0039

Shogun 0019

Siemens 0037, 0535, 0554

Signature 0016

Simpson 0186, 0187

Sinudyne 0177

Solavox 0032

Sonitron 0208

Sonoko 0009, 0037

Sonolor 0208

Sontec 0037

Sony 0000, 0080

Soundesign 0180, 0178, 0179, 0186

Soundwave 0037, 0418

Spectricon 0003

Squareview 0171

Standard 0009

Starlite 0180

Supra 0056

Supre-Macy 0046

Supreme 0000

Sylvania 0054, 0030

Symphonic 0171

Sysline 0037

TMK 0178, 0056, 0177

Tandy 0093

Tatung 0003, 0037

Technics 0051, 0250

Technol Ace 0179

Techwood 0051, 0056, 0003

Teknika 0054, 0180, 0150, 0060,

0019, 0179, 0056, 0016,

0039, 0092, 0186

Telefunken 0056, 0109, 0252

Teletech 0009

Teleton 0186

Texet 0216

Thomson 0109, 0287

Thorn 0035, 0037, 0512, 0535

Tomashi 0282

Toshiba 0154, 0156, 0060,

0035, 0149, 0502

Tosonic 0185

Totevision 0039

Triumph 0177

Ultra 0391

Universum 0037, 0264, 0535

Vector Research 0030

Vestel 0037

Victor 0053

Vidikron 0054

Vidtech 0178, 0019

Viking 0046

Wards 0054, 0165, 0030, 0178, 0021,

0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0080

Watson 0037

White Westinghouse 0037, 0216

Yamaha 0030, 0019

Yoko 0037, 0264

Zenith 0017, 0016, 0092

Zonda 0003

SETUP CODES FOR CABLE

Manufacturer Code

ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1011

Allegro 1315

Archer 1797

BBT 1267

Belcor 1056

British Telecom 1003

Cable Star 1056

Citizen 1315

Colour Voice 1031

Comtronics 1040

Contec 1019

Emerson 1797

Everquest 1015, 1040

Focus 1400

GC Electronics 1056

Gemini 1015

General Instrument 1476, 1011

GoldStar 1144, 1040

Goodmind 1797

Hamlin 1020, 1259, 1009, 1034

Hitachi 1011

Jasco 1315

Jerrold 1003, 1012, 1476, 1014,

1015, 1011, 1024

MNet 1019

Magnavox 1027

Memorex 1000

Movie Time 1063

NSC 1063

Novaplex 1618

Oak 1019

Optimus 1021

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003

Panasonic 1000, 1107, 1021

Paragon 1000

Philips 1027, 1031

Pioneer 1144, 1533

Popular Mechanics 1400

Prelude 1770

Pulsar 1000

RCA 1021

Radio Shack 1015, 1315

Recoton 1400

Regal 1020, 1259

Rembrandt 1011

Runco 1000

SL Marx 1040

Samsung 1144, 1040

Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1477

Signal 1015, 1040

Signature 1011

Sprucer 1021

StarSight 1422

Starcom 1003, 1015

Stargate 1015, 1040, 1770, 1797

Starquest 1015

TV86 1063

TeleCaption 1221

Teleview 1040

Timeless 1418

Tocom 1012

Toshiba 1000

Tusa 1015

United Cable 1003

Universal 1056, 1191

Viewstar 1063, 1027

Zenith 1000, 1054, 1525

Zentek 1400

SETUP CODES

FOR DBS TUNER

Manufacturer Code

AST 2321

Audio Ton 2364

Avalon 2396

Chaparral 2053, 2209

Connexions 2396

DNT 2396

Echostar 2396

Elta 2364

Expressvu 2775

Fuba 2396

Galaxis 2364

Galaxisat 2321

General Instrument 2361

Huth 2364

JSR 2364

JVC 2775

Jerrold 2361

Lemon 2692

NEC 2507

Neusat 2692

Next-Wave 2732

Primestar 2361

Radix 2396

SAT 2321

SatPartner 2692

Seemann 2396

Triad 2321

Wisi 2321, 2396

Zehnder 2321

(DSS)

AlphaStar 2772

Echostar 2775

General Instrument 2869

HTS 2775

Hitachi 2819

Hughes Network System 2749

Jerrold 2627

Magnavox 2724

Memorex 2724

Panasonic 2701

Philips 2724

Primestar 2627

RCA 2566

Sony 2639

Star Choice 2869

Toshiba 2790

Uniden 2724

SETUP CODES

FOR VCR

Manufacturer Code

ASA 3037, 3081

Admiral 3048

Adventura 3000

Aiko 3278

Aiwa 3037, 3000

Akai 3041, 3061, 3281, 3288

Akiba 3072

Akura 3271

Alba 3209, 3072, 3278, 3020, 3295

Ambassador 3020

American High 3035

Amstrad 3000, 3278

Anitech 3072

Asha 3240

Asuka 3037

Audiovox 3037

Baird 3000, 3104, 3041

Basic Line 3072, 3278, 3020

Beaumark 3240

Bell & Howell 3104

Blaupunkt 3162, 3034, 3195,

3226, 3227

Brandt 3187, 3320

Brandt Electronic 3041

Broksonic 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002,

3295, 3361, 3479

Bush 3209, 3072, 3278

CCE 3072, 3278

CGE 3000

Calix 3037

Canon 3035

Capehart 3020

Carver 3081

Catron 3020

Cimline 3072

Cineral 3278

Citizen 3037, 3278

Clatronic 3020

Colt 3072

Condor 3020

Craig 3037, 3047, 3240, 3072, 3271

Crown 3072, 3278, 3020

Curtis Mathes 3060, 3035, 3041, 3162

Cybernex 3240

Cyrus 3081

Daewoo 3045, 3278, 3020

Dansai 3072

Daytron 3020

De Graaf 3042, 3166

Decca 3081, 3000

Denon 3042

Dual 3041

Dumont 3081, 3000, 3104

Dynatech 3000

ESC 3240, 3278

Elbe 3038

Elcatech 3072

Electrohome 3037

Electrophonic 3037

Emerex 3032

Emerson 3037, 3184, 3000, 3121,

3043, 3209, 3002, 3278,

3036, 3061, 3068, 3208,

3212, 3295, 3361, 3479

Ferguson 3041, 3320

Fidelity 3000

Finlandia 3081, 3104

Finlux 3081, 3000, 3042, 3104

Firstline 3037, 3045, 3043, 3209, 3072

Fisher 3047, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066

Frontech 3020

Fuji 3035, 3033

Funai 3000

GE 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3202

GEC 3081

Garrard 3000

General 3020

GoldHand 3072

GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225, 3471

Goodmans 3037, 3000, 3072, 3278,

3062, 3020

Gradiente 3000, 3008

Graetz 3240, 3104, 3041

Granada 3081, 3104, 3046

Grandin 3037, 3000, 3072

Grundig 3081, 3072, 3195, 3226

HCM 3072

HI-Q 3047

Hanseatic 3037

Harley Davidson 3000

Harman/Kardon 3038

Harwood 3072, 3068

Headquarter 3046

Hinari 3240, 3072, 3208

Hitachi 3240, 3000, 3042,

3041, 3166, 3235

Hypson 3072

ITT 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046, 3384

ITV 3037, 3278

Imperial 3000

Interfunk 3081

JVC 3067, 3041, 3008, 3384

Jensen 3041

KEC 3037, 3278

KLH 3072

Kaisui 3072

Kendo 3209

Kenwood 3067, 3041, 3038, 3384

Kodak 3035, 3037

Korpel 3072

LXI 3037

Lenco 3278

Leyco 3072

LIoyd’s 3000, 3208

Loewe 3037, 3081

Logik 3240, 3072

Luxor 3048, 3104, 3043, 3062, 3046

M Electronic 3000

MEI 3035

MGA 3240, 3043, 3061

MGN Technology 3240

MTC 3240, 3000

Magnasonic 3278

Magnavox 3035, 3039, 3081, 3000

Magnin 3240

Manesth 3045, 3072

Marantz 3035, 3081, 3062, 3295

Marta 3037

Matsui 3209, 3036, 3208, 3295

Matsushita 3035, 3162

Memorex 3035, 3037, 3048, 3039,

3047, 3240, 3000, 3104,

3162, 3046

Memphis 3072

Metz 3162, 3195, 3227

Minerva 3195

Minolta 3042

Mitsubishi 3048, 3081, 3067, 3043,

3061, 3173, 3196

Motorola 3035, 3048

Multitech 3000, 3072

Murphy 3000

NEC 3104, 3067, 3041, 3038, 3040

Neckermann 3081

Nesco 3072

Nikko 3037

Nikon 3034

Noblex 3240

Nokia 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046

Nordmende 3041, 3320, 3384

Oceanic 3000, 3041

Olympus 3035, 3226

Optimus 3037, 3048, 3104, 3162

Optonica 3062

Orion 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002,

3036, 3208, 3295, 3479

Osaki 3037, 3000, 3072

Otto Versand 3081

Palladium 3037, 3041, 3072

Panasonic 3035, 3162, 3225,

3226, 3227

Pathe Cinema 3036

Pathe Marconi 3041

Penney 3035, 3037, 3240, 3042,

3038, 3040, 3054

Pentax 3042

Perdio 3000

Philco 3035, 3209, 3038, 3479

Philips 3035, 3081, 3062, 3384

Phonola 3081

Pilot 3037

Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235

Portland 3020

Profitronic 3240

Proline 3000

Proscan 3060, 3202

Protec 3072

Pulsar 3039

Pye 3081

Quarter 3046

Quartz 3046

Quasar 3035, 3162

Quelle 3081

RCA 3060, 3035, 3048,

3240, 3042, 3202

Radio Shack 3037, 3000

Radiola 3081

Radix 3037

Randex 3037

Realistic 3035, 3037, 3048, 3047,

3000, 3104, 3062, 3046, 3066

Rex 3041, 3384

Ricoh 3034

Roadstar 3037, 3240, 3072, 3278

Runco 3039

SBR 3081

SEG 3240

SEI 3081

STS 3042

Saba 3041, 3320, 3384

Saisho 3209, 3036, 3208

Salora 3043, 3046

Samsung 3240, 3045

Sanky 3048, 3039

Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041, 3271, 3479

Sanyo 3047, 3240, 3104, 3046

Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3104, 3041

Schneider 3081, 3000, 3072

Scott 3184, 3045, 3121, 3043, 3212

Sears 3035, 3037, 3047, 3000, 3042,

3104, 3046, 3054, 3066

Seleco 3041

Semp 3045

Sentra 3020

Sharp 3048, 3062

Shintom 3104, 3072

Shogun 3240

Siemens 3037, 3081, 3104, 3054, 3195

Silva 3037

Singer 3045, 3072

Sinudyne 3081

Solavox 3020

Sonolor 3046

Sontec 3037

Sony 3035, 3032, 3000, 3033, 3034

Sunstar 3000

Suntronic 3000

Sylvania 3035, 3081, 3000, 3043

Symphonic 3000

TMK 3240, 3036, 3208

Tashiko 3000

Tatung 3081, 3000, 3041

Teac 3000, 3041

Tec 3020

Technics 3035, 3162, 3226

Teknika 3035, 3037, 3000

Teleavia 3041

Telefunken 3041, 3187, 3320, 3384

Tenosal 3072

Tensai 3000

Thomas 3000

Thomson 3041, 3320, 3384

Thorn 3104, 3041, 3036

Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3043, 3041,

3066, 3212, 3366, 3384

Totevision 3037, 3240

Triumph 3208

Uher 3240

Unitech 3240

Universum 3037, 3081, 3240,

3000, 3195

Vector 3045

Vector Research 3038, 3040

Video Concepts 3045, 3040, 3061

Videosonic 3240

Wards 3060, 3035, 3048, 3047,

3081, 3240, 3000, 3042,

3072, 3062, 3212

White Westinghouse 3278

XR-1000 3035, 3000, 3072

Yamaha 3038

Yamishi 3072

Yokan 3072

Yoko 3240, 3020

Zenith 3039, 3000, 3033, 3034

SETUP CODES

FOR DVD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

JVC 4558

Kenwood 4534

Magnavox 4503

Mitsubishi 4521

Onkyo 4503

Panasonic 4490

Philips 4503, 4539

Pioneer 4525

Proscan 4522

RCA 4522

Sony 4533

Technics 4490

Toshiba 4503

Yamaha 4490, 4545

Zenith 4503

SETUP CODES

FOR LD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 5203

Carver 5064, 5194, 5323

Denon 5059, 5172

Disco Vision 5023

Funai 5203

Hitachi 5023

Magnavox 5194, 5217

Marantz 5064, 5194

Mitsubishi 5059

NAD 5059

Panasonic 5204

Philips 5064, 5194

Pioneer 5059, 5023

Quasar 5204

Realistic 5203

Salora 5064

Samsung 5323

Sega 5023

Sony 5193, 5201

Technics 5204

Telefunken 5059

Theta Digital 5194

Yamaha 5217

SETUP CODES

FOR CD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

ADC 6018

Acoustic Research 6420

Adcom 6155

Aiwa 6157, 6012, 6124

Akai 6156

Arcam 6157

Audio Pro 6437

Audio Research 6157

Audio-Technica 6170

Audio Ton 6157

Audiolab 6157

Audiomeca 6157

BSR 6245

Bestar 6164

Burmester 6420

Bush 6245

California Audio Lab 6029

Carver 6157, 6179, 6437

Condor 6164

Crown 6122

Cyrus 6157

DAK 6245

DKK 6000

Denon 6003, 6034

Elektra 6393, 6437

Emerson 6305, 6155, 6164

Fisher 6179, 6048, 6088, 6342

Garrard 6420, 6393, 6245, 6280, 6425

Genexxa 6032, 6305, 6164, 6426

Goodmans 6305, 6245, 6280

Grundig 6157

Harman/Kardon 6426

Hitachi 6032, 6155

JVC 6072

Kenwood 6028, 6037, 6190, 6048

Kodak 6287

Krell 6157

Kyocera 6018

LXI 6305

Linn 6157

Luxman 6093

MCS 6029, 6043

MTC 6420

Magnavox 6157, 6305

Marantz 6029, 6157, 6180

Matsui 6157

Mclntosh 6287

Memorex 6032, 6305, 6155,

6164, 6180

Meridian 6157

Micromega 6157

Mission 6157

Mitsubishi 6156

NAD 6000

NEC 6043

NSM 6157

Nagaoka 6018

Naim 6157

Nakamichi 6147

Nikko 6164, 6170

Onkyo 6101

Optimus 6000, 6032, 6179, 6305,

6037, 6420, 6048, 6145,

6468, 6087, 6280, 6342,

6426, 6437

Panasonic 6029, 6303

Parasound 6420

Philips 6157, 6287

Pioneer 6032, 6305, 6468, 6244

Poppy 6164

Proton 6157

QED 6157

Quad 6157

Quasar 6029

RCA 6179, 6305, 6053, 6155

Realistic 6179, 6420, 6155, 6164, 6180

Revox 6157

Roadstar 6461

Rotel 6157, 6420

Royal 6420

SAE 6157

STS 6018

Sansui 6157, 6305, 6202

Sanyo 6179, 6048, 6087, 6342

Scott 6305, 6155, 6164

Sears 6305

Sharp 6037, 6180, 6261

Sherwood 6114, 6180, 6426

Shure 6043

Sony 6000, 6185

Soundesign 6145, 6425

Tascam 6420

Teac 6420, 6393, 6180

Technics 6029, 6303

Universum 6157, 6437

Victor 6072

Wards 6157, 6053

Yamaha 6036, 6187, 6261, 6082, 6712

Yorx 6461

SETUP CODES

FOR MD RECORDER

Manufacturer Code

Kenwood 7826

Sony 7490

Yamaha 7888, 7490

SETUP CODES

FOR TAPE DECK

Manufacturer Code

ADC 8171

Aiwa 8029, 8197

Akai 8283

Arcam 8076

Carver 8029

Denon 8076

Fisher 8074

Garrard 8308, 8309, 8375

GoldStar 8375

Grundig 8029, 8375

JVC 8244, 8274, 8303, 8304, 8310

Kenwood 8071, 8092, 8233, 8234

Kyocera 8171

Magnavox 8029

Marantz 8029, 8009

Memorex 8099

Mitsubishi 8283

Onkyo 8136, 8282

Optimus 8027, 8220, 8337

Panasonic 8229

Philips 8029

Phonotrend 8337

Pioneer 8027, 8220, 8099

Revox 8029, 8190

Sansui 8029, 8009

Sanyo 8074

Sharp 8231

Sherwood 8337

Sonic 8375

Sony 8243, 8170, 8291

Teac 8280, 8289, 8308, 8309

Technics 8229

Universum 8375

Victor 8274

Wards 8027

Yamaha 8097, 8094, 8478, 8524

SETUP CODES FOR TV

Manufacturer Code

Abex 0032

Acura 0009

Admiral 0093, 0163, 0213

Adyson 0217, 0032

Akai 0208, 0361

Akura 0218, 0264, 0369

Alaron 0216

Alba 0037, 0218, 0371, 0009,

0036, 0235

Allorgan 0294

Amplivision 0217

Amstrad 0371, 0009, 0362, 0369

Anam 0009, 0068

Anitech 0009, 0068, 0076

Arcam 0216, 0217

Asberg 0076

Asuka 0218

Atlantic 0206

Audiosonic 0037, 0109

Autovox 0206, 0076, 0336

BPL 0282

BSR 0294

BTC 0218

Baird 0343

Basic Line 0218, 0009

Baur 0037, 0010, 0554, 0349, 0361

Beko 0370

Beon 0037

Binatone 0217

Blaupunkt 0554, 0191, 0195, 0200,

0213, 0327, 0328

Blue Sky 0218

Blue Star 0282

Bondstec 0247

Boots 0217

Brandt 0109, 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333, 0335

Brionvega 0362

Britannia 0216

Bush 0037, 0218, 0374, 0371, 0294,

0009, 0282, 0036, 0349

CCE 0037, 0217

CGE 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247, 0306

CS Electronics 0216

CTC 0247

Carrefour 0036

Cascade 0009

Cathay 0037

Centurion 0037

Century 0213

Cimline 0009

Clarivox 0037

Clatronic 0370, 0076, 0247

Condor 0370, 0320

Contec 0216, 0009, 0036, 0157

Continental Edison 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333

Crosley 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213

Crown 0037, 0370, 0418, 0009, 0076

Crystal 0431

Curtis Mathes 0093

Cybertron 0218

Daewoo 0037, 0374, 0009

Dainichi 0218, 0215

Dansai 0037

Dayton 0009

De Graaf 0208

Decca 0037, 0072

Dixi 0037, 0009

Dual 0336, 0352

Dual Tec 0217

Dumont 0070

Elbe 0259

Elin 0037

Elite 0218, 0320

Elta 0009

Emerson 0282, 0213, 0361

Erres 0037, 0012

Expert 0206

Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0005, 0073,

0190, 0238, 0287, 0335, 0343

Fidelity 0216, 0361

Finlandia 0208, 0346, 0359

Finlux 0037, 0072, 0070, 0105, 0346

Firstline 0216, 0217, 0294, 0009,

0321, 0247

Fisher 0370, 0217, 0208, 0303

Flint 0455

Formenti 0037, 0320, 0213

Frontech 0264, 0431, 0163, 0247

Fujitsu 0072, 0206

Funai 0294, 0264, 0303

GE 0282, 0093

GEC 0037, 0217, 0072, 0043, 0205

GPM 0218

Geloso 0009, 0213

Genexxa 0218, 0163

GoldStar 0037, 0217, 0109,

0032, 0290

Goodmans 0037, 0217, 0374, 0371,

0072, 0036, 0235, 0317, 0343

Gorenje 0370

Gradiente 0053

Graetz 0163, 0361

Granada 0037, 0217, 0072, 0146,

0208, 0339, 0359

Grandin 0282

Grundig 0037, 0554, 0070, 0191,

0195, 0205

HCM 0009, 0282

Hanseatic 0037, 0320, 0361

Harley Davidson 0043

Harvard 0068

Hinari 0037, 0218, 0009, 0036

Hisawa 0282, 0455

Hitachi 0217, 0036, 0109, 0032, 0043,

0044, 0105, 0163, 0196,

0198, 0225, 0306, 0349

Huanyu 0216, 0374

Hypson 0037, 0282, 0264

ICE 0217, 0371, 0264

ICeS 0218

ITS 0371

ITT 0163, 0361

Imperial 0370, 0418, 0074, 0076,

0084, 0247

Indiana 0037

Ingelen 0163

Inno Hit 0072

Interbuy 0068

Interfunk 0037, 0163, 0247, 0361

Intervision 0037, 0217, 0264,

0102, 0068

Isukai 0218

JVC 0371, 0036, 0053, 0190, 0192

KTV 0217

Kaisui 0216, 0217, 0218, 0009, 0282

Kamp 0216

Kapsch 0206, 0163

Kawasho 0216

Kendo 0037, 0235, 0362

Kingsley 0216

Kneissel 0259

Korpel 0037

Koyoda 0009

Leyco 0037, 0294, 0072, 0264

Liesenk & Tter 0037

Lloytron 0032

Loewe 0075

Luma 0206

Luxor 0349, 0361

M Electronic 0037, 0217, 0374, 0009,

0109, 0068, 0105, 0163,

0287, 0346

MGA 0150

MTC 0216, 0349

Magnadyne 0102, 0247

Magnafon 0102, 0076, 0213

Magnavox 0036

Manesth 0217, 0320, 0264, 0235

Marantz 0037

Mark 0037

Matsui 0037, 0217, 0371, 0294,

0009, 0072, 0036, 0035,

0011, 0208, 0235

Matsushita 0250

McMichael 0043

Mediator 0037, 0012

Memorex 0009, 0250, 0150

Memphis 0337

Metz 0213, 0367

For Australia model

Modèle pour l’Austrarie

Midland 0032

Minerva 0554, 0070

Minoka 0369

Mitsubishi 0036, 0093, 0108, 0150

Mivar 0216, 0290, 0291, 0292

Motion 0076

Motorola 0093

Multitech 0216, 0217, 0009, 0102, 0076

NEC 0455, 0036

NEI 0037, 0431, 0337

Neckermann 0037, 0554, 0191,

0213, 0349

Nikkai 0037, 0216, 0218, 0072,

0264, 0035, 0032, 0337

Nikko 0317

Nobliko 0102, 0076

Nokia 0361

Nordmende 0109, 0196, 0198,

0213, 0287, 0343

Oceanic 0163, 0215, 0361

Optimus 0250

Optonica 0093

Orion 0037, 0294, 0320, 0321, 0235

Osaki 0217, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0032

Oso 0218

Osume 0072, 0032, 0157

Otake 0317

Otto Versand 0037, 0217, 0320, 0036,

0010, 0554, 0191, 0213,

0343, 0349

Palladium 0370, 0418

Panama 0217, 0264

Panasonic 0250, 0163, 0213, 0214,

0226, 0367

Pathe Cinema 0216, 0320, 0213, 0238

Pathe Marconi 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333

Pausa 0009

Penney 0032

Perdio 0320

Phase 0032

Philco 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213, 0247

Philips 0037, 0374, 0554, 0012,

0043, 0323

Phonola 0037, 0012

Pioneer 0109, 0163, 0287

Profex 0009, 0076, 0361

Proline 0321

Protech 0037, 0217, 0418, 0009,

0264, 0102, 0431, 0247, 0337

Pye 0012

Quasar 0250

Quelle 0037, 0010, 0554, 0011,

0070, 0074, 0084, 0200,

0213, 0306, 0327, 0328, 0361

Questa 0036

R-Line 0037

RBM 0070

RCA 0090, 0093

Radio Shack 0032

Radiola 0037, 0012, 0323

Rank Arena 0036

Realistic 0032

Rediffusion 0361

Revox 0037

Rex 0206, 0264, 0163, 0259

Rhapsody 0216

Roadstar 0218, 0418, 0009, 0264

SBR 0037, 0012, 0043

SEG 0217, 0264, 0036, 0076

SEI 0294, 0102, 0213

Saba 0109, 0075, 0163, 0196, 0198,

0205, 0213, 0287, 0335, 0343

Saccs 0238

Saisho 0009, 0264, 0431, 0011, 0235

Salora 0163, 0349, 0359, 0361

Sambers 0102, 0076, 0213

Sampo 0032

Samsung 0037, 0370, 0217, 0009,

0264, 0032, 0090, 0290

Sandra 0216

Sanyo 0072, 0036, 0011, 0146, 0157,

0208, 0213, 0339

Schaub Lorenz 0361

Schneider 0037, 0218, 0371, 0247,

0303, 0323, 0336, 0352

Sears 0146

Sei-Sinudyne 0010

Seleco 0206, 0163, 0259, 0362

Sentra 0035

Sharp 0036, 0093, 0157

Shorai 0294

Siarem 0102, 0213

Siemens 0037, 0554, 0157, 0191,

0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328

Silver 0036

Sinudyne 0294, 0102, 0213, 0235

Solavox 0032, 0163

Sonitron 0208

Sonoko 0037, 0009

Sonolor 0163, 0208, 0215

Sontec 0037

Sony 0036, 0010, 0011

Soundwave 0037, 0418

Standard 0217, 0218, 0009

Stern 0206, 0163, 0259

Sunkai 0294, 0321

Susumu 0218

Sysline 0037

Tandy 0217, 0218, 0072, 0093, 0163

Tashiko 0217, 0036, 0043, 0359

Tatung 0037, 0217, 0072

Tec 0217, 0247

Technema 0320

Technics 0250

Teknika 0150

Teleavia 0205, 0333, 0343

Telefunken 0109, 0005, 0074, 0084,

0101, 0213, 0262, 0306,

0335, 0343

Telemeister 0320

Teletech 0009

Teleton 0217, 0206, 0349

Tensai 0218, 0294, 0320, 0317

Texet 0216, 0218

Thomson 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205,

0287, 0333, 0343, 0349

Thorn 0037, 0072, 0035, 0074,

0084, 0190, 0192, 0361

Thorn-Ferguson 0343

Tomashi 0282

Toshiba 0036, 0035, 0070, 0243

Trical 0157

Triumph 0243

Uher 0206, 0320, 0303

Ultra 0192

Ultravox 0102

Universum 0037, 0370, 0264,

0105, 0346

Vestel 0037

Victor 0053

Videosat 0247

Videotechnic 0217

Vidtech 0036

Vision 0320

Voxson 0163

Waltham 0217

Watson 0037, 0320

Watt Radio 0102

Wega 0036

White Westinghouse 0037, 0216, 0320

Yoko 0037, 0217, 0264, 0431

Zanussi 0206

SETUP CODES FOR CABLE

Manufacturer Code

ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1017

Birgmingham Cable Communications

1276

British Telecom 1003, 1105

Cabletime 1161, 1271, 1377

Clyde 1086

Contec 1019

Decsat 1423

Filmnet 1443

France Telecom 1451

GEC 1086

General Instrument 1276

GoldStar 1144

Jerrold 1003, 1276, 1014

MNet 1443, 1019

Magnavox 1032

Memorex 1000

Movie Time 1156

NSC 1156

Oak 1019

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003

Panasonic 1000

Paragon 1000

Pioneer 1144, 1260

Pulsar 1000

Runco 1000

STS 1156

Salora 1382

Samsung 1144

Satbox 1375

Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1277, 1017

Starcom 1003

Tele+1 1443

Teleservice 1281

Toshiba 1000

Tudi 1286

United Cable 1003

Videoway 1250

Westminster 1105

Zenith 1000

SETUP CODES

FOR DBS TUNER

Manufacturer Code

AST 2321, 2351

Alba 2455, 2421, 2362, 2613

Aldes 2288

Allantide 2333

Amstrad 2080, 2252, 2345, 2461, 2501

Ankaro 2369, 2288, 2220, 2519, 2217

Anttron 2421, 2183

Arcon 2368

Armstrong 2243

Astra 2108, 2539

Astro 2520, 2173, 2358, 2501

Avalon 2396

Axis 2369, 2530

BT 2668

Barcom 2217

Beko 2189

Best 2369, 2217

Blaupunkt 2173

Boca 2243, 2513

Brain Wave 2332

Bush 2067

CNT 2520

Cambridge 2344

Channel Master 2362

Chaparral 2053, 2209

CityCom 2394

Commlink 2288

Connexions 2396

Crown 2243

Cyrus 2200

D-box 2723

DDC 2362

DNT 2396, 2200

Diskxpress 2217

Drake 2268

EIF 2417

Echostar 2396, 2871

Emanon 2421

FTE 2331

Ferguson 2183, 2067, 2189, 2336

Fidelity 2252

Finlux 2455, 2108, 2344, 2397

Fracarro 2871

Freecom 2421, 2335

Fuba 2421, 2369, 2396, 2217,

2297, 2417

G-Sat 2183

Galaxis 2288, 2834, 2863

Galaxisat 2321

GoldStar 2335

Gooding 2571

Goodmans 2189

Grothusen 2335

Grundig 2571, 2173, 2189, 2328

Harting und Helling 2333

Hinari 2183

Hirschmann 2502, 2173, 2573,

2287, 2333, 2397, 2398

Hitachi 2455

Houston 2668

Huth 2243, 2288, 2220, 2346

ITT 2108

InVideo 2871

Intervision 2592

JVC 2571

Johansson 2332

Kathrein 2173, 2200, 2092, 2331,

2358, 2394, 2442, 2480, 2504

Kosmos 2331, 2335

Kreiselmeyer 2173

Kyostar 2421

La Sat 2520, 2513, 2464

Lemon 2692

Lenco 2421, 2335

Lennox 2592

Lupus 2369

Luxor 2573, 2108

Manhattan 2455, 2592, 2520

Marantz 2200

Maspro 2092, 2328, 2336

Matsui 2571, 2344

Mediamarkt 2243

Micro Technology 2333, 2539

Minerva 2571

Morgan’s 2243, 2513

Multistar 2331, 2464

Muratto 2335

Navex 2332

Neuhaus 2501

Neusat 2692, 2834

Newhaus 2220

Nikko 2360

Nokia 2455, 2573, 2108, 2328,

2397, 2873

Nordmende 2362

Orbitech 2501

Oxford 2344

Pace 2455, 2183, 2067, 2328,

2336, 2791

Palcom 2297

Palladium 2571

Palsat 2501

Panda 2455

Philips 2455, 2571, 2200, 2292, 2328

Phonotrend 2288, 2592

Planet 2871

Plasmatic 2442

Polytron 2394

Promax 2455

Prosat 2288

Quadral 2362, 2519

RFT 2288, 2220, 2200

Radiola 2200

Radix 2396, 2882

SAT 2321, 2351, 2461

SEG 2421, 2369, 2539

STVI 2417

Saba 2520, 2336

Sabre 2455

Sagem 2820

Salora 2108

Samsung 2287

SatPartner 2421, 2332, 2520, 2502,

2335, 2692

Satcom 2605, 2346

Satec 2183, 2328

Satmaster 2346

Schwaiger 2183, 2394, 2504

Seemann 2396, 2530

Siemens 2173

Skymaster 2288, 2605, 2519

Star Trak 2421

Strong 2421

Sunstar 2513

TPS 2820

Tantec 2455, 2297, 2336

TechniSat 2262, 2501

Techniland 2346

Telefunken 2421

Teleka 2243, 2613

Telesat 2605

Thomson 2455

Tonna 2668, 2346

Triad 2321, 2333, 2335, 2351

Triasat 2501

Unitor 2332, 2217

Universum 2571, 2173

Vector 2333

Ventana 2200

Vortec 2421

Vtech 2351

Wevasat 2333

Winersat 2332

Wisi 2455, 2396, 2173, 2321,

2351, 2372, 2406, 2407

XSat 2889

Xcom Multimedia 2889

Zehnder 2520, 2321, 2331

SETUP CODES FOR VCR

Manufacturer Code

ASA 3037, 3081

Admiral 3048

Adventura 3000

Aiko 3278

Aiwa 3000, 3037, 3307, 3348, 3352

Akai 3315, 3106, 3041, 3053

Akiba 3072

Alba 3072, 3020, 3278, 3209,

3315, 3352

Ambassador 3020

Amstrad 3000, 3278, 3325, 3332

Anitech 3072

Asha 3240

Asuka 3037

Audiovox 3037

Baird 3000, 3041, 3104, 3107

Basic Line 3072, 3020, 3278

Beaumark 3240

Bell & Howell 3104

Blaupunkt 3034, 3226, 3195,

3003, 3006, 3154,

3162, 3227, 3403

Brandt 3320, 3187, 3321

Brandt Electronic 3041

Broksonic 3209

Bush 3072, 3278, 3209, 3352

CCE 3072, 3278

CGE 3000

Calix 3037

Capehart 3020

Carver 3081

Catron 3020

Cimline 3072

Cineral 3278

Citizen 3037, 3278

Clatronic 3020

Colt 3072

Combitech 3352

Condor 3020

Craig 3072, 3037, 3047, 3240

Crown 3072, 3020, 3278

Curtis Mathes 3041, 3162

Cybernex 3240

Cyrus 3081

Daewoo 3020, 3278, 3045

Dansai 3072

Daytron 3020

De Graaf 3042, 3166

Decca 3000, 3081

Denon 3042

Dual 3041

Dumont 3000, 3081, 3104

Dynatech 3000

ESC 3278, 3240

Elbe 3038

Elcatech 3072

Electrohome 3037

Electrophonic 3037

Emerex 3032

Emerson 3000, 3037, 3278, 3209,

3036, 3043, 3088

Ferguson 3320, 3041, 3107, 3321

Fidelity 3000

Finlandia 3081, 3104

Finlux 3000, 3081, 3042, 3104

Firstline 3072, 3037, 3209,

3045, 3043

Fisher 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104

Frontech 3020

Fuji 3033

Funai 3000

GE 3048, 3240

GEC 3081

Garrard 3000

General 3020

Go Video 3432

GoldHand 3072

GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225

Goodmans 3072, 3000, 3020,

3037, 3278, 3403

Gradiente 3000, 3008

Graetz 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240

Granada 3081, 3046, 3104

Grandin 3072, 3000, 3037

Grundig 3072, 3081, 3347, 3226,

3195, 3003, 3006, 3007,

3207, 3349, 3403

HCM 3072

HI-Q 3047

Hanseatic 3037

Harley Davidson 3000

Harman/Kardon 3038

Harwood 3072

Headquarter 3046

Hinari 3072, 3004, 3240, 3352

Hitachi 3000, 3004, 3042, 3041,

3166, 3235, 3240

Hypson 3072

ITT 3106, 3046, 3384, 3005,

3041, 3104, 3240

ITV 3037, 3278

Imperial 3000

Ingersol 3004

Interfunk 3081

JVC 3067, 3384, 3008, 3041,

3206, 3207, 3486

Jensen 3041

KEC 3037, 3278

KLH 3072

Kaisui 3072

Kendo 3209, 3106

Kenwood 3067, 3384, 3038, 3041

Kodak 3037

Korpel 3072

LXI 3037

Lenco 3278

Leyco 3072

LIoyd’s 3000

Loewe 3037, 3004, 3081, 3006

Logik 3072, 3004, 3240

Luxor 3106, 3048, 3046, 3043, 3104

M Electronic 3000

MGA 3043, 3240

MGN Technology 3240

MTC 3000, 3240

Magnasonic 3278

Magnavox 3000, 3081

Magnin 3240

Manesth 3072, 3045

Marantz 3081, 3003, 3006

Marta 3037

Matsui 3209, 3004, 3036,

3088, 3348, 3352

Matsushita 3162

Memorex 3000, 3037, 3048,

3046, 3047, 3104,

3162, 3240, 3307

Memphis 3072

Metz 3347, 3195, 3003,

3006, 3162, 3227

Minerva 3195, 3006

Minolta 3042

Mitsubishi 3081, 3067, 3048, 3043

Motorola 3048

Multitech 3072, 3000

Murphy 3000

NEC 3067, 3038, 3041, 3104

Neckermann 3081

Nesco 3072

Nikko 3037

Nikon 3034

Noblex 3240

Nokia 3106, 3046, 3041, 3104, 3240

Nordmende 3320, 3384, 3041,

3297, 3321

Oceanic 3000, 3041

Okano 3315, 3348

Olympus 3226

Optimus 3037, 3432, 3048, 3104, 3162

Orion 3209, 3004, 3036,

3088, 3348, 3352

Osaki 3072, 3000, 3037

Otto Versand 3081

Palladium 3072, 3037, 3006, 3041

Panasonic 3226, 3162, 3225, 3227

Pathe Cinema 3036

Pathe Marconi 3041

Penney 3037, 3042, 3038, 3054, 3240

Pentax 3042

Perdio 3000

Philco 3209, 3038

Philips 3081, 3384, 3403

Phonola 3081

Pilot 3037

Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235

Portland 3020

Profex 3322

Profitronic 3240

Proline 3000

Protec 3072

Pye 3081

Quarter 3046

Quartz 3046

Quasar 3162

Quelle 3081

RCA 3106, 3042, 3048, 3240

RFT 3403

Radio Shack 3000, 3037

Radiola 3081

Radix 3037

Randex 3037

Realistic 3000, 3037, 3048,

3046, 3047, 3104

Rex 3384, 3041

Ricoh 3034

Roadstar 3072, 3037, 3278, 3240

SBR 3081

SEG 3322, 3240

SEI 3004, 3081

STS 3042

Saba 3320, 3384, 3041, 3206,

3207, 3297, 3321

Saisho 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088

Salora 3106, 3046, 3043

Samsung 3432, 3045, 3053, 3240

Sanky 3048

Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041

Sanyo 3046, 3047, 3104, 3240

Saville 3352

Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3005,

3041, 3104

Schneider 3072, 3000, 3081

Scott 3045, 3043

Sears 3000, 3037, 3042, 3046,

3047, 3054, 3104

Seleco 3041

Semp 3045

Sentra 3020

Sharp 3048

Shintom 3072, 3104

Shogun 3240

Shorai 3004

Siemens 3037, 3081, 3195, 3003,

3006, 3054, 3104

Silva 3037

Singer 3072, 3045

Sinudyne 3004, 3081

Solavox 3020

Sonolor 3046

Sontec 3037

Sony 3000, 3032, 3033, 3034, 3011

Sunkai 3348

Sunstar 3000

Suntronic 3000

Sylvania 3000, 3081, 3043

Symphonic 3000

TMK 3036, 3240

Tashiko 3000

Tatung 3000, 3081, 3041

Teac 3000, 3041

Tec 3020

Technics 3226, 3162

Teknika 3000, 3037

Teleavia 3041

Telefunken 3320, 3384, 3041,

3187, 3321

Tenosal 3072

Tensai 3322, 3000

Thomas 3000

Thomson 3320, 3384, 3041

Thorn 3036, 3041, 3104

Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3384,

3041, 3043

Totevision 3037, 3240

Towada 3322

Uher 3240

Unitech 3240

Universum 3000, 3037, 3081, 3106,

3195, 3006, 3240, 3325

Vector 3045

Vector Research 3038

Video Concepts 3045

Videosonic 3240

Wards 3072, 3000, 3081, 3042,

3048, 3047, 3240

White Westinghouse 3278

XR-1000 3072, 3000

Yamaha 3038

Yamishi 3072

Yokan 3072

Yoko 3020, 3240

Zenith 3000, 3033, 3034

SETUP CODES

FOR DVD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Kenwood 4534

Magnavox 4503

Onkyo 4503

Panasonic 4490

Philips 4539, 4503

Pioneer 4525

Sony 4533

Technics 4490

Thomson 4551

Toshiba 4503

Yamaha 4490, 4545

Zenith 4503

SETUP CODES

FOR LD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 5203

Carver 5064, 5194

Cyrus 5388

Denon 5059, 5172

Disco Vision 5023

Funai 5203

Hitachi 5023

Magnavox 5194, 5217

Marantz 5064, 5194

Mitsubishi 5059

NAD 5059

Panasonic 5204, 5496

Philips 5064, 5388, 5194

Pioneer 5023, 5059

Quasar 5204

Radiola 5388

Realistic 5203

Salora 5064

Sega 5023

Sharp 5001

Sony 5193, 5201

Technics 5204, 5496

Telefunken 5059

Theta Digital 5194

Thorn 5014

Yamaha 5217

SETUP CODES

FOR CD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 6124, 6157, 6419

Akai 6108, 6156, 6199

Alba 6536, 6288, 6334

Arcam 6157

Audio Research 6157

Audio Ton 6157

Audiolab 6157

Audiomeca 6157

BSR 6134

Bestar 6164

Binatone 6452

California Audio Lab 6029

Carver 6157, 6179

Condor 6134, 6164

Cyrus 6157

DKK 6000

Denon 6003, 6034

Dual 6196

Emerson 6164

Fisher 6048, 6179, 6342

GE 6334

Genexxa 6032, 6164

GoldStar 6525, 6383

Goodmans 6536

Grundig 6157

Harman/Kardon 6108, 6173

Hitachi 6032, 6291

JVC 6072

Kenwood 6037, 6523, 6028,

6048, 6190

Kodak 6287

Krell 6157

Linn 6157

Luxman 6328

M Electronic 6525

MCS 6029

Magnavox 6157, 6038, 6129

Marantz 6157, 6029, 6038, 6129

Matsui 6157, 6288, 6307

Mclntosh 6287

Memorex 6032, 6164

Meridian 6157

Micromega 6157

Mission 6157

Mitsubishi 6108, 6156

NAD 6000

NSM 6157

Naim 6157

Nikko 6525, 6164

Onkyo 6101, 6102

Optimus 6000, 6032, 6037, 6536,

6048, 6179, 6196, 6342

Panasonic 6303, 6029, 6367

Philips 6157, 6274, 6287

Pioneer 6032

Poppy 6164

Proton 6157

QED 6157

Quad 6157

Quasar 6029

RCA 6179

Realistic 6164, 6179

Revox 6157, 6113

Roadstar 6461, 6525, 6527

Rotel 6157

SAE 6157

Sansui 6157, 6202, 6513

Sanyo 6048, 6179, 6342

Schneider 6134

Scott 6164

Sharp 6037, 6262, 6265

Sherwood 6114, 6196

Siemens 6516

Signature 6108

Sony 6000, 6490

Teac 6378

Technics 6207, 6303, 6029

Toshiba 6481

Universum 6157

Victor 6072

Wards 6157, 6108

Yamaha 6036, 6082, 6187, 6712

Yorx 6461

SETUP CODES

FOR MD RECORDER

Manufacturer Code

Kenwood 7826

Sony 7490

Yamaha 7888, 7490

SETUP CODES

FOR TAPE DECK

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 8029, 8197, 8200

Akai 8188, 8189

Arcam 8076

Carver 8029

Denon 8076, 8412

Fisher 8074

Grundig 8029

Harman/Kardon 8182

JVC 8244, 8273, 8274

Kenwood 8070, 8071, 8092,

8205, 8233, 8234

Magnavox 8029

Marantz 8029, 8009

Memorex 8099, 8101

Mitsubishi 8189

Onkyo 8136, 8135

Optimus 8027, 8220

Panasonic 8229

Philips 8029

Pioneer 8027, 8099, 8101, 8220

Revox 8029

Sansui 8029, 8009

Sanyo 8074

Sharp 8205

Sony 8170, 8243

Technics 8229

Victor 8273, 8274

Wards 8027

Yamaha 8094, 8097, 8205, 8478, 8524

V293670

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

Quick Reference Card

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

LEVEL

MUTE

SLEEP

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET +/–

INPUT

DSP

EXT. DEC.

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

EFFECT ON/OFF

ON SCREEN

STANDBY

TEST

SET MENU

VOLUME

UP/DOWN

A/B/C/D/E

100

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

ENTER

HALL

TEST

DSP program

m AMP/TUN

m DSP

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

INPUT

REC/PAUSE

DIR A

SKIP (MD)

REWIND

BACKWARD

(MD)

DISPLAY (MD)

DECK A/B

DIR B

SKIP (MD)

PAUSE

STOP

FAST

FORWARD

PLAY

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

m TAPE/MD

m CD

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

SKIP

PLAY

BACKWARD

INPUT

DISC SKIP

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

(TV INPUT)

PAUSE

STOP

FAST

FORWARD

DISPLAY

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

SKIP/SEARCH

PLAY

SUBTITLE (DVD)/

BACKWARD (LD)

SUBTITLE

ON/OFF (DVD)

DISC SKIP

INPUT

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

(TV INPUT)

PAUSE

STOP

ANGLE (DVD)/

FAST

FORWARD (LD)

AUDIO (DVD)

m DVD/LD

V296050

m VCR m TV

m CBL/DBS

m DVD MENU

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

+10

MENU LEFT

MENU SELECT

SET UP

TITLE

DISC SKIP

Numeric

keys

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

TITLE/INDEX

MENU RIGHT

(TV INPUT)

MENU UP

MENU DOWN

CLEAR

RETURN

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

MENU LEFT

CHANNEL

ENTER

MENU SELECT

CHANNEL

+(UP)/–(DOWN)

CHANNEL

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

+100

(TV INPUT)

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

RECALL

MENU DOWN

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

TV POWER

TV MUTE

TV SLEEP

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

+(UP)/–(DOWN)

CHANNEL

TV VOLUME

DISPLAY

TV EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV INPUT

(VCR)

A/B/C/D/E

100

SET UP

RETURN

LEVEL

SET MENU

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MONO MOVIE

/DTS

SURROUND

DISCO

TV SPORTS

ROCK

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

CLEAR

SLEEP

ENTER

HALL

TEST

EFCT

DISP

DSP

DISC SKIP

PRESET

ON/OFF

INDEX

A/B

VCR REC TV INPUT

ON SCREEN

SUBTITLE ANGLE

AUDIO

ON/OFF

TITLE

VOLUME

MUTE

CODE SET

SELECT

DIR

(TV POWER)

CHANNEL

ENTER

VCR REC (*1)

PLAY

REWIND

CHANNEL

+(UP)/–(DOWN)

CHANNEL

POWER

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

(TV INPUT)

PAUSE

STOP

FAST

FORWARD

Quick Reference Card

*1: Press this key twice to start recording.

Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour démarrer l’enregistrement.

Diese Taste zweimal drücken, um die Aufnahme zu starten.

Tryck två gånger på denna knapp för att starta inspelningen.

Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.

Oprima dos veces esta tecla para empezar a grabar.

Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.

V296070

Transcripción de documentos

UCAT R-V1105 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI • Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space below. Model: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 6 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. English 19 For US customers only: EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a Yamaha Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) System—an extremely sophisticated audio component. The DSP system takes full advantage of Yamaha’s undisputed leadership in the field of digital audio processing to bring you a whole new world of listening experiences. Follow the instructions in this manual carefully when setting up your system, and the DSP system will sonically transform your room into a wide range of listening environments—anything from a famous concert hall to a cozy jazz club. In addition, you get incredible realism from most of surround-sound encoded video sources available in the market using the builtin Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder, Dolby Digital Decoder and DTS Decoder. Five built-in channels of amplification on this model mean that no additional amplifiers are required to enjoy advanced digital sound field processing. Rather than tell you about the wonders of digital sound field processing, however, let’s get right down to the business of setting up the system and trying out its many capabilities. Please read this operation manual carefully and store it in a safe place for later reference. English CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................................... Inside of the Front Cover BASIC OPERATION ............................................... 33 Playing a source .................................................... 33 CAUTION .................................................................. 2 Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD)......................... 37 Sound control......................................................... 38 INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 3 Tuning ..................................................................... 39 Features .................................................................... 3 Basic operation ................................................... 39 What’s DSP?............................................................. 4 Preset tuning ........................................................ 40 Using digital sound field processor (DSP) ......... 43 GETTING STARTED ................................................ 7 Getting started.......................................................... 7 Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP) ................................ 43 Unpacking .............................................................. 7 Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and subwoofer......................... 46 Installing batteries in the remote controller ........... 8 Brief overview of digital sound field programs...... 48 Notes about the remote controller.......................... 8 Controls and their functions ................................... 9 ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................... 51 Front panel ............................................................. 9 Display panel........................................................ 11 “SET MENU” mode ............................................... 51 Creating your own sound fields .......................... 55 PREPARATION ...................................................... 12 Speaker setup......................................................... 12 Setting the SLEEP timer ....................................... 60 REMOTE CONTROLLER ....................................... 61 Connections ........................................................... 14 Audio/video source equipment ............................ 14 Speakers ............................................................. 20 Antennas ............................................................. 23 Plugging in this unit ............................................. 25 Basic operation ..................................................... 61 Key name and function ......................................... 62 Entering manufacturer codes .............................. 67 Restoring the default codes ................................. 68 On screen display .................................................. 26 Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU” mode) ............................................. 27 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 69 Speaker balance adjustment ................................ 30 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 72 LIST OF MANUFACTURE’S CODE .............................................. The end of this manual 1 CAUTION : Read this before operating your unit. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never remove the unit cover. Contact your dealer if an object falls inside the unit. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull on the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. <Singapore model only> Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm on the both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit to prevent fire and damage. 6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. 8. Always set the VOLUME control to “– ∞” before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. 9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this mode, this unit is designed to consume a small amount of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. For Canadian Customers To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003. WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED; The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. 11. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time, disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR (SURROUND) REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B:I6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I20V 60Hz I00W MAX. TOTAL 13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not defeated. 14. Do not connect an audio unit to the AC outlet on the rear panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. 15. Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 2 (U.S.A. model) Features 5 Channel Power Amplification Main: Center: Rear: 85W + 85W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz 85W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz 85W + 85W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz English INTRODUCTION Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ● Automatic Preset Tuning ● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) ● IF Count Direct PLL Synthesizer Tuning System Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing Others ● Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) ● Dolby Digital Decoder ● Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder ● DTS Decoder ● “SET MENU” Mode which Provides You with 13 Titles of Setting Changes and Adjustments for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound Experience by the Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ● BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic Surround ● SLEEP Timer ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ● Speaker Output Mode Selection Capability for the Most Suitable Use of Your Speaker System ● On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ● OPTICAL and COAXIAL Digital Audio Signal Terminals ● 6 Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ● Video Signal Input/Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ● Universal Remote Controller with Preset Manufacturer Codes 3 INTRODUCTION What’s DSP? Introduction Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment. This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV receiver available. Some of the more advanced features may not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature films in theaters around the world. To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take some time now to read more about these features and enjoy the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater. Digital Sound Field Processing Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30 years have enhanced the listening experience with improved clarity, precision and power. However, something has still been missing: The atmosphere and acoustic ambiance of the public venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they collected is used to recreate these environments in digital sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields are created using data measured directly at the original venue; others are created from combinations of data to form unique environments for specific purposes. Of course, that only solves half of the problem. These engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your listening room, so we’ve made it possible for you to adjust the various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any source and in combination with any of the following surround sound technologies. Some are designed especially for music, and some especially for movies. Dolby Pro Logic Surround Dolby Pro Logic Surround has been used in movie theaters since the mid-seventies. It has also been available in home entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. 4 Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Pro Logic Surround encoding as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with standard analog processors. INTRODUCTION Dolby Digital is the next level of Dolby Surround sound system developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate audio coding. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system (left front, center, right front and just one surround channel), Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the three front channels. Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as mentioned left, and moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2 channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2 channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby Digital in the market. English Dolby Digital Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater sound in your home. Wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full range channels and precise sound orientation by the digital sound processing presents listeners much excitement and realism that has never been experienced before. DTS Digital Surround DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of superb digital audio. The DTS technology, through intense research and development, made it possible to deliver a similar encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surroundsound entertainment. The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available for home theater systems By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS installed theater’s high quality sound in your home. Laserdisc, compact disc and DVD are home audio format within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new multi-channel music recordings will also become available in the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.) Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the six channels of 20-bit audio onto some laserdiscs, compact discs and DVDs with considerably less data-compression. 5 INTRODUCTION CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening room is very different from a movie theater. However, Yamaha DSP technology allows you to create nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your home by compensating for the lack of presence and dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround sounds. CINEMA DSP The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Surround or DTS. Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surrounddecoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the room, letting you feel much presence as if you were watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digital-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and much surround effect in the room without losing high channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This is the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 2, 3 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 1 is selected, and the input signal of the source is analog, PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channels. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 2, 3 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 1 is selected, and the input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (except in 2channels) or encoded with the DTS. 6 Getting started English GETTING STARTED Unpacking Carefully remove this unit and accessories from the box. You should find the unit itself and the following accessories. Remote controller Indoor FM Antenna POWER STANDBY AMP/TUN /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV AM Loop Antenna CODE SET MUTE VOLUME INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER VCR REC TV DIR A SUBTITLE ON/OFF TV INPUT A/B / SET UP ON SCREEN SELECT DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3) 7 GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote controller Notes about the remote controller Battery replacement Since the remote controller will be used for many of this unit’s control operations, you should begin by installing the supplied batteries. 1. Turn the remote controller over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2. Insert the batteries (AA, R6, UM-3 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Close the battery compartment cover. 2 If you find that the remote controller must be used closer to the main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new ones. Notes ● Use AA, R6, UM-3 batteries. ● Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) ● Remove the batteries if the remote controller is not used for an extended period of time. ● If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material and contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Be sure to insert the new batteries within 2 minutes after you remove the old batteries from the remote controller. If the remote controller is left for more than 2 minutes without batteries, all of the codes you entered will be cleared and the remote controller will return to the factory preset condition. 1 3 Remote controller operation range Remote control sensor Within approximately 6 m (19.7 feet) 30° 30° Notes ● The area between the remote controller and the main unit must be clear of large obstacles. ● Do not expose the remote control sensor to strong lighting, in particular, an inverter type fluorescent lamp. Otherwise, the remote controller may not work properly. If necessary, position the main unit away from direct lighting. 8 GETTING STARTED English Controls and their functions Front panel 2 1 NATURAL SOUND 3 4 5 6 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 60 2 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B A 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 2 7 8 9 0A B 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 5 2 EDIT TUNING MODE –dB FM/AM DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM 4 L5 C 5R S VIDEO D E G IJK M N L F H VIDEO L AUDIO R O P For the remote controller, refer to pages 61 to 68. 1 STANDBY/ON switch Press this switch to turn on the power. Press this switch again to set this unit in the standby mode. * A click from the switch and the initial rotation of the built-in fan will be heard when the power is turned on. Standby mode This unit is still using a small amount of power in this mode in order to be ready to receive infrared-signals from the remote controller. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote controller. 3 Display panel Displays a variety of information. (Refer to page 11 for details.) 4 TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button Press this button repeatedly until the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator is illuminated on the display. Sound source played or recorded on the unit connected to the TAPE/MD IN (PLAY)/OUT (REC) AUDIO SIGNAL terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source taking priority of the INPUT SELECTOR’s setting. Press this button repeatedly until the “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. Sound signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source taking priority of the INPUT SELECTOR’s setting. Press this button repeatedly until the original display mode is restored to cancel the above input sources. 5 INPUT SELECTOR Turn this knob to select the input source. The selected source will be shown on the display. 6 Master VOLUME control Simultaneously controls volume for all output sounds; main, rear, center and subwoofer. (The REC OUT level is not affected.) * The indicator on the master VOLUME control will flash when the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the remote controller. 7 PHONES jack Headphones can be plugged into this jack for private listening. You can listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers through headphones. When listening with headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A and B switches to the OFF position and turn off the digital sound field processor by pressing the EFFECT button so that no DSP program name is illuminated on the display panel. PHONES 9 GETTING STARTED 8 A/B/C/D/E button H FM/AM button Press this button to select a group (A–E) of preset stations. Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. 9 SPEAKERS switches Press the switch A or B (or both) for the main speakers you will use inward (ON). Press and release the switch for the main speakers you do not use outward (OFF). 0 Preset station number selector buttons Select a preset station number (1 to 8). I LEVEL button This button is used to adjust the output level of the center and rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this button (several times) to select the speaker(s). The name appears on the display. Then press the + or – button (J) to change the output level. A BASS EXTENSION button Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency response at the main left and right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used. J –/+ button B TONE BYPASS button Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone control circuitry can be used when this button is released outward (OFF). K SET MENU button C BASS and TREBLE controls Rotate these knobs to adjust the low and high frequency response for the left and right main channels only. D BALANCE control This knob controls the sound from the main speakers only. The balance of the output volume to the left and right main speakers can be adjusted to compensate for sound imbalances caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. E MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) button Use this button to enter a station to memory. Refer to the section “Manual preset tuning” on page 40 for details. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. Refer to page 41 for details. F EDIT button This button is used to exchange the places of two preset stations with each other. G TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) button Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator is illuminated on the display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated. 10 Adjusts the level of the speaker(s) selected by pressing the LEVEL button. Moreover, performs setting changes and adjustments for functions selected by pressing the SET MENU button (K). Press this button once or more to select the desired function in the SET MENU mode. L TUNING DOWN/UP button Used for tuning. Press the “UP” side to tune in to a higher frequency, and press the “DOWN” side to tune in to a lower frequency. M PROGRAM selector button Press this button in the or direction to select a digital sound field processing program. N EFFECT button Press this button to turn on and off the output from the center and rear speakers. The sound becomes normal 2-channel when this function is turned off. However, this does not apply to Dolby Digital or DTS. The signals at all channels will be distributed to the main channels and output from the main speakers, even if the output from the center and rear speakers are turned off, when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded. O VIDEO AUX terminals Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a camcorder to these terminals. A video unit with a S video output terminal can be connected to the S VIDEO terminal to obtain a high resolution picture. The source can be selected with the INPUT SELECTOR. P INPUT MODE button Press this button to select how input signals are received from sources that output two or more types of signals. The “AUTO”, “DTS” and “ANALOG” modes are available. Refer to page 36 for details. GETTING STARTED English Display panel 1 2 3 DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP MEMORY 4 5 ENHANCED MOVIE THEATER 12 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE DISCO JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT CHURCH CONCERT HALL AUTO 6 7 1 indicators Either “dts” indicators will be illuminated when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. A red “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a compact disc or laserdisc encoded with DTS. An orange “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a DVD encoded with DTS. An orange “dts” indicator may be illuminated when playing a laserdisc encoded with DTS after a video-CD or DVD on a DVD/LD combi-player. STEREO 0 20 DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR TAPE/MD MONITOR SLEEP 100 89 0 A B 6 MEMORY indicator A flashing MEMORY indicator means a station can be saved, as explained in the following: Press the MEMORY button. The MEMORY indicator will flash about 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, program the displayed station to memory by using the A/B/C/D/E and the preset station number selector buttons. 7 DSP program indicators 2 Multi-information display This display shows the current DSP program and the status of adjustments and setting changes. Several statuses can be viewed at one time. The current station frequency and band (AM or FM) will also appear when the tuner source input mode is selected. The name of the selected DSP program will be illuminated in the following cases. • When the tuner is selected as the input source • When a DSP program parameter is selected or adjusted. • When the DSP program No. 2, 3 or the subprogram “Enhanced” of No. 1 is selected. There is no illumination here when no DSP program is selected 3 Input source indicators 8 AUTO indicator One of the arrows for these indicators will be illuminated depending on which source is selected. This indicator will be illuminated during the automatic tuning mode. 4 9 STEREO indicator DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators The DIGITAL indicator will be illuminated when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the source encoded with Dolby Digital are not 2-channels. The PRO LOGIC indicator will be illuminated when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on. 5 DSP indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. This indicator will be illuminated when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is received. 0 Signal-level indicator This indicator shows the signal level of the received station. If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases. A TAPE/MD MONITOR indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected to the TAPE/MD IN and OUT terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source by pressing the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button. B SLEEP indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 11 PREPARATION Speaker setup m Setting up your speaker system This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field quality with a full five-speaker system setup, using a pair of main speakers to output main source sounds, a pair of effect speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a fivespeaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the fivespeaker system later. Use of the center dialog speaker is recommended When playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or playing back a source which contains center-channel signals with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater system, it is recommended that you use a center channel speaker. If, for some reason, it is not practical to use a center speaker, it is possible to enjoy the movie without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded. You may wish to choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier. m Speakers and speaker placement Your full five-speaker system will require two speaker pairs: the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers) and the REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may also be using a SUBWOOFER. The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models and have enough power handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER and REAR SPEAKERS. Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the ordinary position. Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position. They should be nearly 1.8m above the floor. Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically shielded speaker.) If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is not so critical because low bass tones are not highly directional. Main speaker Subwoofer 12 Center speaker Rear speaker PREPARATION English m Speaker system configurations 4 Speaker System 5 Speaker System The recommended system for enjoying Audio/Video sources. By the use of a center speaker, center channel sounds (dialog, vocals etc.) are precisely localized. 1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “LRG” or “SML”. (See page 27.) Basic system. You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding a pair of rear speakers to a basic stereo speaker system. However, center channel sounds must be output from the left and right main speakers. 1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “NONE”. (See page 27.) 13 PREPARATION Connections Caution: Plug in this unit and other components after all connections are completed. All connections must be correct, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also refer to the owner’s manual for each of your components. Audio/video source equipment ● ● Use RCA type pin plug cables for audio/video units with the exception described later. The output (or input) terminals of YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 3, 4, etc. on the rear panel must be connected to the same-numbered terminals of this unit. m Basic connections TV monitor AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN (*1) VIDEO OUT LD player, DVD player, etc. GND OUTPUT Turntable (U.S.A. model) EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT GND MAIN CENTER SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD/LD TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL FM ANT S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR IN OUT SUB WOOFER REMOTE CONTROL GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT IN OUT VCR MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD S VIDEO SIGNAL PHONO CD 1 TV/DBS OUT VCR VIDEO SIGNAL IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) 3 TAPE/MD 4 DVD/LD IN TV/DBS OUT VCR CD player MD recorder, Tape deck, etc. (*1): GND terminal (For turntable use) Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases better results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. 14 TV/Satellite tuner VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT LINE IN LINE OUT OUTPUT AUDIO SIGNAL Video cassette recorder : Indicates the direction of signals. PREPARATION These terminals are used to connect a video input source such as a camcorder. English VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel) PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models only) EXTERNAL DECO GND MAIN CENTER VIDEO AUX Ω UNBAL. CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD/LD TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R SUB WOOFER PAL NTSC S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL television formats. Set this switch to the position for the format your TV monitor employs. AUDIO OUT R R AUDIO OUT L L VIDEO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO Camcorder : S-video cable (Refer to page 18 for details about the S VIDEO terminal.) PAL: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the PAL format. Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. NTSC: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the NTSC format. Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. Note Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same format that your TV monitor employs, otherwise a picture will not be played back normally. For Custom Installer (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) REMOTE CONTROL (IN, OUT) terminals (U.S.A. model) These terminals are used for custom installation system. When this unit is connected to the components for custom installation system, you can operate this unit with the system remote control. Connect the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of this unit to the output terminal of the central controller for custom installation system. By connecting the REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminal of this unit to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of the other component, you can also operate it with the system remote control. In this way, up to 6 components can be connected in series. EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT GND MAIN CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD/LD CENTER SURROUND TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL SUB WOOFER 15 PREPARATION m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals To make an optical digital connection between this unit and an external unit, remove the cover from each optical terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not function correctly. If your CD player, LD player, DVD player, TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL or OPTICAL, or both terminals. Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are necessary, especially for an LD player, a DVD player or a CD player to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to this unit. Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 36 for details.) LD player, DVD player, etc. COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT TV/Satellite tuner OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT GND MAIN CENTER SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT DVD/LD TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL FM ANT S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR IN OUT SUB WOOFER REMOTE CONTROL GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT CD player PHONO CD MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD 1 TV/DBS OUT VCR VIDEO SIGNAL IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) 3 TAPE/MD 4 DVD/LD IN TV/DBS OUT VCR (U.S.A. model) : Coaxial cable 16 OUT VCR AUDIO SIGNAL : Optical fiber cable Notes ● When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to both terminals of the same name. ● Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from dust. IN S VIDEO SIGNAL ● ● In order to make this unit perform successful DTS-decoding, the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or corrupted in the process of sending the DTS bitstream from the DIGITAL OUT terminal of an external unit to a digital signal input terminal of this unit. All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. PREPARATION English m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL RF output of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD source with DTS decoded. If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal, it can be connected to this unit by using an RF demodulator (separate purchase). First, connect the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal input terminal of the RF demodulator. Next, connect the coaxial digital signal output terminal of the RF demodulator to the COAXIAL digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for sending audio signals of an LD source encoded with Dolby Digital to this unit. When these connections are completed, set the input mode of the DVD/LD source to “AUTO”, and you will hear sounds decoded with Dolby Digital even if signals are input to both COAXIAL and OPTICAL digital signal input terminals of this unit. This is because signals input to the COAXIAL terminal take priority over signals input to the OPTICAL terminal. Refer to page 36 for details about switching the input mode. It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal stereo (or monaural). Notes ● If, for example, you play a CD on the DVD/LD/CD combiplayer, there is no input to the COAXIAL terminal, so the signals input to the OPTICAL terminal take priority. In this case, switch off the RF demodulator to listen to CD sound without interference. However, if your RF demodulator is the Yamaha model APD-1, you do not have to switch it off. ● When you want to play an LD source encoded with Dolby Digital without decoding Dolby Digital, you must switch off the power of the RF demodulator. RF demodulator COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT (U.S.A. model) DOLBY DIGITAL RF IN EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT GND MAIN CENTER SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. DVD/LD/CD combiDOLBY DIGITAL player, etc. RF OUT CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD/LD TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL FM ANT S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR IN OUT SUB WOOFER REMOTE CONTROL GND AM ANT ANALOG OUT MONITOR OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT IN OUT VCR MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD S VIDEO SIGNAL PHONO CD 1 TV/DBS OUT VCR VIDEO SIGNAL IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) 3 TAPE/MD 4 DVD/LD IN TV/DBS OUT VCR AUDIO SIGNAL 17 PREPARATION m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals Note If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective output terminals. If your video cassette recorder and your monitor are equipped with “S” video terminals, connect this unit’s S VIDEO SIGNAL VCR IN and OUT terminals to the “S” video input and output of your video cassette recorder, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your monitor. In addition, a video unit equipped with an “S” video output can be connected to the VIDEO AUX S VIDEO terminal on the front of this unit. With these connections, you can play back or record high quality pictures. Otherwise, connect the “composite” video terminals from your video cassette recorder, etc. to the VIDEO SIGNAL terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal to the “composite” video input of your monitor. S VIDEO terminals This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition to standard type VIDEO terminals. S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison with S VIDEO terminals, standard type VIDEO terminals transmit “composite” video signals. (U.S.A. model) (*1) : S-video cable EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT GND MAIN CENTER SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD/LD TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL FM ANT S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR IN OUT SUB WOOFER REMOTE CONTROL GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD S-VIDEO IN IN(PLAY) PHONO CD 1 OUT(REC) 3 TAPE/MD 4 IN DVD/LD AUDIO SIGNAL TV monitor (*1): ON SCREEN SELECTOR S VIDEO/VIDEO switch Set this switch to either position to select the TV monitor on which you want to display the on-screen information. S VIDEO: The on-screen information is displayed on the TV monitor connected to the S VIDEO SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal. VIDEO: 18 OUT VCR The on-screen information is displayed on the TV monitor connected to the composite VIDEO SIGNAL MONITOR OUT terminal. TV/DBS OUT VCR VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN TV/DBS VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO IN OUT VCR S-VIDEO IN IN S VIDEO SIGNAL S-VIDEO OUT MONITOR OUT Video cassette recorder PREPARATION Notes When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. ● The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER,” “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input to these terminals. The setting of “5. MAIN LEVEL” is effective. (Refer to pages 27 to 28 for details.) ● The adjustments of the output level of the center speakers, rear speakers and subwoofer are effective when the signals input to these terminals are selected as the input source. (Refer to pages 46 to 47 for details.) This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) for inputting signals from an external decoder of a future format to this unit. To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these terminals, press the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button on the front panel repeatedly until “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. By doing so, the signals input to these terminals are sent to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and OUTPUT terminals of this unit. English m Connecting an external decoder of a future format to this unit ● (U.S.A. model) EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT GND MAIN CENTER SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD/LD TV/DBS OPTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL OUT GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT IN OUT VCR MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD S VIDEO SIGNAL PHONO CD 1 TV/DBS OUT VCR VIDEO SIGNAL IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) 3 TAPE/MD 4 DVD/LD IN TV/DBS MAIN OUT SUB WOOFER REMOTE CONTROL CENTER OUT IN SURROUND OUT S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR SUBWOOFER OUT FM ANT OUT VCR AUDIO SIGNAL External decoder 19 PREPARATION Speakers Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit. Rear speakers Right Left Center speaker Subwoofer system CENTER REAR (SURROUND) OUTPUT MAIN CENTER REAR (SURROUND) SUB WOOFER CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. MAIN A A B B SPEAKERS Right Right Left Left Main speakers A Main speakers B How to Connect: Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with the wire of the proper gauge (keep as short as possible). If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct. That is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit or the speakers, or both. For connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals <U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only> Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 1 3 20 ➀ Loosen the knob. ➁ Insert the bare wire. [Remove approx. 5mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] ➂ Tighten the knob and secure the wire. PREPARATION Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Note on main speaker connections: One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. English For connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Note on a subwoofer connection: ➀ ➀ Press the tab. ➁ Insert the bare wire. ➂ [Remove approx. 5mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] ➂ Release the tab and secure the wire. ➁ You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when reproducing discrete signals. When using a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer. With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer are in the same unit. Such a subwoofer needs only the connection between the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit and the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer. (Refer to page 22 for details about the SUBWOOFER terminal.) m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED: The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. (Upper position) Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Main: IMPEDANCE SELECTOR If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR (SURROUND) (Lower position) REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B:I6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I20V 60Hz I00W MAX. TOTAL Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Main: (U.S.A. model) <Except Canada model> If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher. <For Canada model only> The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. 21 PREPARATION m To drive main, center and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers The speaker connections described on page 20 are fine for most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to drive main, center and/or rear speakers with your existing amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit. 3 This terminal is for center channel line output. If you drive a center speaker with an external power amplifier, connect the input terminal of the external amplifier to this terminal. There is no connection to this terminal when you use the built-in amplifier. OUTPUT MAIN CENTER CENTER terminal REAR (SURROUND) 4 SUB WOOFER 1 2 1 3 4 MAIN terminals These terminals are for main channel line output. If you drive main speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. * Output signals from the MAIN terminals are affected by the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, BASS EXTENSION button and the TONE BYPASS button. 2 SUBWOOFER terminal When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to this terminal. Low frequencies distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal. (The cut-off frequency of this terminal is 90 Hz.) Signals of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also output if they are assigned to this terminal. 22 REAR (SURROUND) terminals These terminals are for rear channel line output. If you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. Notes • Output level of signals from all of these terminals are adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel or VOLUME keys on the remote controller. • If an external power amplifier is connected to the MAIN, CENTER, or REAR output terminals, do not use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals (MAIN, CENTER, or REAR). PREPARATION English Antennas ● ● Each antenna should be connected to the designated terminals correctly, as shown in the following figure. Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality only with the indoor antennas, the use of an outdoor antenna may result in improvement. Outdoor AM antenna Indoor FM antenna (included) Outdoor FM antenna AM loop antenna (included) (U.S.A. model) GND 75Ω UNBAL. CD DVD/LD OPTICAL COAXIAL DIGITAL SIGNAL FM ANT S VIDEO VIDEO ON SCREEN SELECTOR 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT 75-ohm coaxial cable IN OUT VCR S VIDEO SIGNAL PHONO CD 1 IN (PLAY) 3 TAPE/MD 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter 300-ohm flat ribbon cable Ground m Connecting the AM loop antenna 1. Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole. 4. Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Loop antenna 2. Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3. Return the tab back to the original position to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good connection. Antenna stand 1 3 5. Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. 2 Notes ● The AM loop antenna should be placed apart from the main unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall. ● The AM loop antenna should be kept connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 23 PREPARATION m Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. GND terminal For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the GND terminal to a good ground. A good ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Note Do not use an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. m Optional outdoor AM antenna If this unit is placed in steel buildings or an area far from broadcasting stations, it may be necessary to install an outside long wire antenna. m Optional outdoor FM antenna Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna. The choice of the flat ribbon cable is also important. Flat ribbon cable performs well electrically, and is cheaper and somewhat easier to handle when routing it through windows and around rooms. Coaxial cable is more expensive, does a much better job of minimizing interference, is less prone to the effects of weather and close-by metal objects, and is nearly as good a signal conductor as flat ribbon cable. Coaxial cable is somewhat more difficult to install at the point where the cable enters the building. If coaxial cable is selected, make sure the antenna is designed to be used with this type of cable. * Use a 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (not included) or a 75-ohm antenna adapter (not included) for connections. 300-ohm flat ribbon cable 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter 75-ohm coaxial cable 300-ohm flat ribbon cable 24 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm antenna adapter Notes for FM antenna installation ● To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise, locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible. ● Keep the flat ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as possible. Do not bundle or roll up an excess of the cable. ● The antenna should be at least two meters (6.6 feet) from reinforced concrete walls or metal structures. PREPARATION English Plugging in this unit • After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord into an AC outlet. • Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is not to be used for a long period of time. (General model) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR OUTPUT MAIN CENTER VOLTAGE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR (SURROUND) REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B:I6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER SUB WOOFER (*2) AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I00W MAX. TOTAL (*1) To AC outlet (*1): (*2): AC OUTLET(S) Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) (U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models) .......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS (Australia model).................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET Use these to connect the power cords of your components to this unit. The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch or the remote controller’s POWER and STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is 100W. 25 PREPARATION On screen display If you connect your VCR, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display program titles, parameter data and information for various setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor screen. This information will be superimposed over the video image. If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the information will be displayed over a blue colored background. Selecting a type of display You can change the type of display showing various information on the monitor screen by pressing the ON SCREEN display key on the remote controller. Press this key to change the screen to a full or simple display, or no display at all. INDEX DISP ON SCREEN (Example) Full display Note: The program titles, parameter data and other information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit. Simple display Goes off after being displayed for several seconds. Notes ● When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET MENU mode, or adjusting the speaker balance by using the test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor screen even if another type of display is currently selected. ● Information displayed on the monitor screen in this way cannot be recorded by a VCR. 26 PREPARATION English Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU” mode) The following functions control the output signals to the speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to maximize the performance of your speaker system. * For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 51 to 54. 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL m Function description 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE Preset position: LRG Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LRG: When your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. SML: When you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). NONE: When you do not have a center speaker. The center channel sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. LARGE: If your rear speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker in parallel. In this position, full range signals are output from the rear speakers. SMALL: If your rear speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). 27 PREPARATION 3. MAIN SPEAKER 5. MAIN LEVEL Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE Choices: Normal/–10dB Preset position: Normal LARGE: If your main speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels are output from the main speakers. SMALL: If your main speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). 4. LFE/BASS OUT Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: SW MAIN: If your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels, signals from the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed from other channels are output from the main speakers. SW/BOTH: Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals at LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed from other channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals. When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN SPEAKER”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the main channels to the SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH position, low bass signals from the main channels are output to both of the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER terminals. Note The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT” have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit. 28 Normal: Normally, select this position. –10dB: If the volume levels to the center and/or rear speakers are lower than the level to the main speakers even though they are adjusted to maximum. The volume level to the main speakers are decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker output level balance properly. PREPARATION English m Changing selections Refer to the display panel or the monitor screen when changing the selections. DSP 2 1 EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET 1 POWER CH STANDBY ON/OFF CH TV CODE SET AMP/TUN MUTE VOLUME NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER INDEX VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 STANDBY/ON POWER 4 VCR REC TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER DISP SLEEP 8 40 TV A/B / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS TREBLE 0 l l l B A 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF 3 4 4 5 5 2 /DTS SURROUND 2 3 4 5 UP INPUT MODE CD LEVEL SET MENU 3 4 5 DOWN TUNING 1 VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 4 –dB FM/AM AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 TUNING MODE MONO MOVIE PROGRAM DVD/LD 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 4 ROCK PHONO 7 3 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 3 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR DIR A 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 AMP/TUN SET UP RETURN +100 CLEAR ON/OFF ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU Use one of the buttons figured below to select the desired position. AMP/TUN LEVEL Remote control SET MENU or 1 3 2 EFCT Front panel STANDBY DIR B SUBTITLE 9 TEST A/B/C/D/E 3 SELECT CHURCH ENTER When using the remote controller, the selector dial must be set at “AMP/TUN”. Remote control 2 TAPE/MD 2 DSP POWER TV INPUT 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E ON SCREEN DIR A SELECT DIR B Turn on the power of this unit. (If necessary, turn on the power of the monitor to display information.) Remote control Front panel POWER STANDBY/ON DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR or Changes. 2 Select the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” by using one of the following methods. Front panel LEVEL Remote control AUDIO SET MENU 4 Follow the same procedure for “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER”, “4. LFE/BASS OUT” and/or “5. MAIN LEVEL”. First select the function by following step 2, and then select the proper position by following step 3. MENU SET MENU AUDIO MENU Press once or more. SET MENU or Press once. Press once or more. DIR A DIR B SELECT Press once or more. DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 29 PREPARATION Speaker balance adjustment This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test tone generator. After the adjustments, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and the DTS decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote controller. 2 4 NATURAL SOUND POWER 4 STANDBY AMP/TUN 1 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 2 60 /DTS SURROUND 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l B 2 2 3 ON ON OFF OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 2 5 2 3 4 BALANCE 0 l l 3 4 5 4 5 5 2 EDIT TUNING MODE –dB FM/AM DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE LEVEL SET MENU 3 4 5R MONO MOVIE VIDEO TV SPORTS TV/DBS 4 L AUDIO R JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 7 8 HALL 1 EXT. DEC. 5 CD MOVIE THEATER 1 4 Turn on the power. Remote control Front panel POWER MONO MOVIE 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO DVD/ D or Front panel VCR BASS 0 l l 2 2 Front panel 3 4 4 5 l6 5 BALANCE 0 l l 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 L5 5R Set to the “0” position. l2 28 TREBLE 0 l l 2 3 VOLUME 20 7 CLEAR STANDBY TUNER 1 9 TEST +100 ENTER AMP/TUN /DTS SURROUND 6 CHURCH A/B/C/D/E STANDBY/ON AMP/TUN +10 0 Set the selector dial of the remote controller to “AMP/TUN”. POWER VCR 5 ROCK PHONO 3 6 3 DISCO DVD/LD S VIDEO MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 EFFECT PROGRAM 4 L5 TUNER 1 VIDEO AUX 2 3 MOVIE THEATER 1 CD AUTO/MAN’L MONO 8 4 40 6 Front panel BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 60 0 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 3 ON Set to the “OFF ( Select main speakers A or B. Front panel SPEAKERS A OFF 7 )”. Press the TEST key on the remote controller to enter the test mode. B Remote control ON OFF TEST +100 CLEAR * Both speakers A and B can be selected. CONTINUED 30 PREPARATION CH TV CODE SET NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER 8 MUTE VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 VOLUME l2 28 8 TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER INDEX 4 40 STANDBY/ON DISP SLEEP 2 60 POWER 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 2 3 ON 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 4 4 5 TUNING MODE 5 2 DOWN TUNING UP TV INPUT MODE VCR REC LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX TV INPUT A/B / EFFECT 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIR A 9 8 ON SCREEN –dB FM/AM AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 EDIT English CH 9 Turn up the volume. Remote control 10 DIR B SELECT SET UP RETURN SUBT T E ANG E Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound output level of the left main speaker and the right main speaker are the same. TV Front panel CODE SET BALANCE 0 l l MUTE VOLUME 2 2 3 3 4 4 L5 You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes as shown below. Main (L) Center Main (R) 10 5R Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost the same as the main speakers. How to adjust: Pressing the or key adjusts the level to the speaker (except the main speakers) currently outputting the test tone. * Pressing the key raises and the key lowers the level. * While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. Remote control Rear (R) DIR A SELECT DIR B Rear (L) * The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor screen by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. EFFECT LEVEL CENTER + 2dB * If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the center channel test tone from the left and right main speakers. If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test tone by pressing the or key once or more so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the display. * While holding the or key pressed, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. * “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected, “R SUR.” shows the right rear speaker, and “L SUR.” shows the left rear speaker. * The output level of the selected speaker can be adjusted by the or key. Remote control DIR A SELECT DIR B CONTINUED 31 PREPARATION ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 11 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV CODE SET MUTE VOLUME INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER VCR REC / 11 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST key once again to cancel the test tone. Remote control TEST +100 CLEAR Disappears 32 TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B Notes Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust the sound level on your audio system by using the VOLUME control (or the VOLUME keys on the remote controller) only. ● If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to obtain proper balance. ● If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 10, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting the function “5. MAIN LEVEL” in the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position. ● English BASIC OPERATION Playing a source 4 3 1 3 POWER STANDBY AMP/TUN NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON TREBLE 0 l l l B A OFF 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 5 UP INPUT MODE /DTS SURROUND LEVEL 3 4 5 DOWN TUNING SET MENU CD VIDEO AUX EFFECT 1 2 3 4 5 FM/AM AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 TUNING MODE EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES –dB PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO MONO MOVIE L AUDIO R DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 2 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 2 MOVIE THEATER 1 TAPE/MD TUNER 3 2 DISCO VCR TV SPORTS TV/DBS 4 6 5 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 9 8 TEST +100 +10 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E When using the remote controller, the selector dial must be set at “AMP/TUN”. Remote control POWER 3 Turn on the power. Front panel Remote control STANDBY POWER AMP/TUN STANDBY/ON AMP/TUN or /DTS SURROUND CD MOVIE THEATER 1 4 3 2 MONO MOVIE DISCO DVD/LD 4 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD TUNER 1 TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 Front panel Select an input source. (For video sources, turn on the TV/monitor.) The selected source is shown on the display panel and the monitor screen. Front panel Remote control /DTS SURROUND VOLUME CD l6 1 20 l2 28 or MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 8 ROCK PHONO 7 4 40 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD TUNER 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 +10 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E 2 60 0 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 2 Select main speakers A or B. Front panel SPEAKERS A ON B OFF DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR Name of the selected input source To select the tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE/MD terminals or the source connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals, use one of the buttons figured below. (Refer to page 35 for details.) Front panel Remote control MOVIE THEATER 2 HALL TAPE/MD EXT. DEC. 0 or 3 TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER * Both speakers A and B can be selected. CONTINUED 33 BASIC OPERATION /DTS SURROUND 5 CD 7 1 MONO MOVIE 5 DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER EXT. DEC. VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR 0 l6 20 l2 28 TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 8 8 4 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B A 3 4 4 5 5 2 2 3 4 DISCO TV/DBS 8 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR A/B/C/D/E DSP DOWN TUNING UP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET ON/OFF INPUT MODE CH AUTO/MAN’L MONO LEVEL CH TV VIDEO AUX SET MENU EFFECT PROGRAM CODE SET 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R MUTE 7 8 VOLUME 8 INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER VCR REC TV The current input mode is also shown for a source that inputs two or more types of signals to this unit. To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently selected source on the remote controller. (Refer to page 36 for details on switching the input mode.) Front panel 6 ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / 5 VCR –dB FM/AM 3 4 5 3 2 TV SPORTS 2 3 4 5 TUNING MODE BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 EDIT MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD ENTER 40 STANDBY/ON MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER Play the source. (Refer to page 39 for details on tuning.) 7 Front panel Remote control VOLUME Remote control l6 20 l2 TV MONO MOVIE INPUT MODE DVD/LD or 28 8 CODE SET 4 4 40 or MUTE VOLUME 2 60 0 –dB DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR Input mode When you finish using this unit Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel or the STANDBY key on the remote controller to enter the standby mode. Front panel Remote control STANDBY STANDBY/ON or 34 Adjust the output level. 8 Adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc. (refer to page 38) and use the digital sound field processor. (Refer to pages 43 to 45.) BASIC OPERATION Use one of the buttons figured below to make the corresponding indicator illuminated on the display. Front panel TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER Press once or more. TAPE/MD MONITOR or Notes on input source selection ● Note that selecting an input source means that the source which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on the rear panel is selected. * To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX terminals on the front panel, select “V-AUX”. ● If you select a video input source without canceling the source already selected in the way described on the left, you will see the picture of the video input source and hear the sound of the source already selected. ● If a different audio source is selected with the input selector keys on the remote controller while enjoying a video source, the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard, but the picture from the video source can still be seen. ● When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the same input source was last selected will be automatically recalled. ● If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is not operating correctly, “INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display. English To select the tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE/MD terminals or the source connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. Remote control MOVIE THEATER 2 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 or TAPE/MD 3 TAPE/MD MONITOR “TAPE MONITOR”: “EXT. DECODER”: Lights up for a few seconds just after you select the tape deck connected to the TAPE/MD terminals. Lights up when the source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals is selected. Note The input source selected in this way has priority over any other input source already selected. To select another input source, cancel both of the sources connected to the TAPE/MD and EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals. To cancel both of the sources connected to the TAPE/MD and EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals. Use one of the buttons figured above to make neither “EXT. DECODER” nor “TAPE/MD MONITOR” are illuminated on the display. 35 BASIC OPERATION m Switching the input mode for the CD, DVD/LD and TV/DBS sources This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. The following three input modes are provided. AUTO This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. 1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 2. Analog input signal (ANALOG) * For a DVD/LD source, if digital signals are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. DTS In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though digital signals are input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals instead of digital input signals. Notes on input mode selection ● The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with function “12. TV/DBS INPUT” in the SET MENU mode. This unit will be automatically set to the selected input mode when the power is turned on. ● Set the input mode to the AUTO mode to play a DVD/LD source encoded with Dolby Digital. ● Select the ANALOG mode to play a normal 2-channel source with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program. ● The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital input signal was selected again. ● The input mode cannot be changed for PHONO, TUNER, TAPE/MD, VCR and VIDEO AUX sources because only analog signals are used. ● The present input mode appears on the front display and monitor screen when the input source is changed to DVD/LD, CD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is changed. The present input signal is also shown on the monitor screen when the input mode is changed to AUTO, as shown below. * However, the present input signal will not be shown when the input mode is switched during the speaker test mode. Only AUTO will be displayed. Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS ● Select the DTS mode when playing an LD or CD source encoded with DTS. (Red “dts” indicator is illuminated on the display panel.) If the “AUTO” mode is selected, a noise may be heard just after playback begins. Do not play these sources in the ANALOG mode because only background noise will be output from the speakers. ● This unit is automatically locked in the DTS decoding mode when playing a CD or LD source encoded with DTS in the AUTO mode to prevent background noise in future operation. The red “dts” indicator will be flashing. In this mode, no sound will be heard if a disc with normal digital signals (PCM) is played from a CD or LD source. To play back the disc normally, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel, or, the input selector key for the current source on the remote controller. 36 BASIC OPERATION English Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD) m Recording the playing source to tape (or MD) 4 1 /DTS SURROUND 2 1 CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. NATURAL SOUND 0 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER DISCO VCR TV/DBS 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 28 8 60 2 DSP TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l l B A 2 2 3 ON ON OFF OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 CH 3 4 2 5 DOWN TUNING UP LEVEL SET MENU 3 4 CH TV VIDEO AUX EFFECT CODE SET 2 PROGRAM 4 L5 ON/OFF INPUT MODE 2 3 4 5 –dB FM/AM CLEAR AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 TUNING MODE EDIT 9 TEST +100 EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET 4 0 2 BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS CHURCH A/B/C/D/E l2 40 STANDBY/ON 1 4 3 2 TV SPORTS l6 20 A/B/C/D/E MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD ENTER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER 5R S VIDEO VIDEO MUTE L AUDIO R VOLUME INDEX 1 Select the source you want to record. Front panel Remote control /DTS SURROUND CD or 2 1 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up to confirm the input source. (Refer to page 39 for details on tuning.) Front panel Remote control VOLUME l6 20 l2 TV 28 8 CODE SET MUTE or 4 40 VOLUME 2 60 Notes on recording The VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, the BASS EXTENSION button and the settings of DSP have no effect on the material being recorded. ● Turn off the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator when the recording is finished by pressing the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button once or more. Also, do not make “EXT. DECODER” appear on the display. ● Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only a S video (or only a composite video) signal on your VCR. ● A source that is connected to this unit between optical or coaxial digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. ● A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded. ● Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe on copyright laws. ● 0 –dB 3 4 Begin recording to the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or VCR connected to this unit. If the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) is used for recording, you can monitor the sound of recording. To monitor the sound of recording, light up the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator on the display by pressing the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button or TAPE/MD key. Front panel If you play back a video source that uses scramble or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case that display information superimposed on the picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those signals. Remote control MOVIE THEATER 2 or TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER TAPE/MD 3 TAPE/MD MONITOR 37 BASIC OPERATION Sound control m Adjusting the BALANCE control Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. m Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE controls BASS 0 l TREBLE 0 l l l 2 2 3 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 4 2 4 5 2 3 3 4 5 4 5 3 3 4 4 L5 5R Note This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. m Using the BASS EXTENSION button Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency response at the main left and right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used. BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS ON BASS : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the low frequency response. TREBLE : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response. Note These controls are effective only for the sound from the main speakers. m Using the TONE BYPASS button Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone control circuitry can be used when this button is released outward (OFF). OFF BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS ON 38 5 2 OFF BASIC OPERATION English Tuning Basic operation Quick automatic-search tuning (automatic tuning) is effective when the station signals are strong with no interference. However, manual tuning can be used during less-than-ideal conditions. 1 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B A 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 4 4 5 TUNING MODE FM/AM 5 2 DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 EDIT –dB LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 4 m Automatic tuning 1 2 m Manual tuning 1 Select “TUNER” as the input source. Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be illuminated. 2 FM/AM Select “TUNER” as the input source. Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be illuminated. FM/AM or 3 3 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 or Press the “UP” side once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the “DOWN” side once to tune in to a lower frequency. DOWN TUNING TUNING MODE Turn the “AUTO” indicator off. AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 Tune to the desired station manually. DOWN TUNING UP UP * Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. * Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station. * Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station because the signals are weak. Note Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the reception to monaural to increase the signal quality. 39 BASIC OPERATION Preset tuning m Manual preset tuning This unit can store station frequencies selected by the tuning operation. With this function, you can recall any desired station only by selecting the preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored. 1 3 2 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD Select “AMP/TUN” 4 DISCO NATURAL SOUND 7 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR EXT. DEC. l2 28 8 60 2 TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 0 4 40 STANDBY/ON POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 5 4 5 5 TUNING MODE 2 DOWN TUNING UP LEVEL VIDEO AUX SET MENU EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET AMP/TUN AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 2, 1 CLEAR DSP INPUT MODE CH EFFECT 3 TEST +100 +10 ON/OFF CH TV 2 3 9 8 A/B/C/D/E –dB FM/AM BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 EDIT V-AUX ENTER STANDBY 0 A/B/C/D/E CHURCH JAZZ CLUB HALL l6 20 6 5 ROCK PHONO VCR TV SPORTS TV/DBS PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R CODE SET 2 MUTE VOLUME 2, 1 4, 2 3 /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 INDEX TAPE/MD DISP SLEEP POWER 3 ON SCREEN TV To store stations 1 2 To recall a preset station 1 Tune to a station. (Refer to the previous page for the tuning procedure.) Select the group of preset stations. Remote control Front panel Select a group (A – E) of preset stations. +10 A/B/C/D/E ENTER or A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E 2 3 Select the preset station number. Front panel Remote control MEMORY 1 MEMORY 2 3 DISC SKIP PRESET 4 or MAN’L/AUTO FM CH CH Flashes on and off for about 5 seconds. 4 Select a preset station number (1 to 8) where you want to program the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off from the display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 STEREO AUTO 0 20 7 8 DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 100 Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A1. * In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8. * You can program more stations to the preset station numbers on other groups in the same way by selecting other groups in step 2. 40 Notes A new setting can be programmed in place of the former one. • For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. • Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data from being lost even if this unit is set to the standby mode or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to a temporary power failure. If, however, the power is cut for more than one week, the memory may be deleted. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following the Preset tuning steps. BASIC OPERATION You can make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations. With this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and stores FM stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual preset tuning method on page 40. NATURAL SOUND English m Automatic preset tuning CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS TREBLE 0 l l l B A 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF 3 4 2 3 4 5 4 5 5 2 2 FM/AM DOWN TUNING LEVEL UP SET MENU INPUT MODE VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO 2 1 To store stations 1 TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 4 5 EDIT –dB VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 If you want to store the first received station to the desired preset station number. FM/AM If, for example, you want to store the first received station to C5, select “C5” by using the A/B/C/D/E button and the preset station number selector buttons after pressing the MEMORY button in step 2. Then press the TUNING button. The first received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ... sequentially. If stations are stored up to E8, the automatic preset tuning is finished automatically. Press and hold for more than 3 seconds MEMORY When the automatic preset tuning is finished The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on page 40. MAN’L/AUTO FM To recall a preset station STEREO DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on page 40. A recalled station is shown by the frequency on the display. MEMORY AUTO 0 20 100 Flashes 3 DOWN TUNING UP To tune to higher frequencies, press the “UP” side once. To tune to lower frequencies, press the “DOWN” side once. * If the TUNING button is not pressed, in a while, the automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher frequencies. Notes ● You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM station manually by simply following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on page 40. ● If the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search will be finished automatically after searching all frequencies. ● With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural manually and program it by following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on page 40. The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed. Received stations are programmed to A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially. * If more than 8 stations are received, they are also programmed to the preset station numbers on other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. 41 BASIC OPERATION m Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below. NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 2 3 ON 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 4 4 5 5 TUNING MODE 2 –dB FM/AM DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 EDIT LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2, 4 Example) If you want to exchange the preset stations on E1 and A5 with each other. 1 Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the method of “To recall a preset station” on page 40). 4 EDIT 2 EDIT MEMORY Flashes. 3 Recall the preset station on A5 by following the same method with step 1. DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR MEMORY 0 20 100 MEMORY Shows the exchange of stations is completed. Flashes. 42 BASIC OPERATION English Using digital sound field processor (DSP) This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments. In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic Surround or DTS. This unit has 10 programs for digital sound field processing; 5 programs for Audio sources and 5 programs for Audio/Video sources. In addition, some programs have two subprograms. All programs contain parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste. For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 48 to 50. Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP) MOVIE THEATER 1 CD TUNER 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER HALL l2 EXT. DEC. 8 0 4 40 STANDBY/ON 2 60 2 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B A 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 TUNING MODE –dB FM/AM DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO LEVEL SET MENU 3 4 +10 9 TEST +100 CLEAR VIDEO AUX A/B/C/D/E DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET ON/OFF EFFECT 2 3 6 CHURCH ENTER TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER PHONES 8 l6 20 28 VCR 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 7 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR 3 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS 4 ROCK PHONO NATURAL SOUND TAPE/MD 2 CH PROGRAM CH TV 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R CODE SET MUTE VOLUME 2 INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER ON SCREEN TV 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “Playing a source” on pages 33 to 34. 2 When operating on the front panel: If no program name is illuminated on the display panel, press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound field processor so that a name of a DSP program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen. When operating on the remote controller: When the selector dial is set at a position other than DSP: The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. POWER DSP STANDBY When the selector dial is set at DSP: Go on to the next step. DSP POWER AMP/TUN STANDBY DSP EFFECT /DTS SURROUND CD DVD/LD TV/DBS V-AUX VCR MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD /DTS SURROUND CD MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD * Do the next operation while the indicator is illuminated. If the indicator goes off before you do the next operation, press the DSP key again. CONTINUED 43 BASIC OPERATION /DTS SURROUND CD 1 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER MONO MOVIE INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER DVD/LD 3 VOLUME 4 ROCK PHONO 7 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B A 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 4 4 5 TUNING MODE 5 2 HALL –dB FM/AM DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE EXT. DEC. AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 EDIT LEVEL 0 VIDEO AUX SET MENU MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER EFFECT 2 3 3 4 A/B/C/D/E PROGRAM 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO DSP L AUDIO R EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF TV CH CODE SET 3 3 MUTE VOLUME Select a program that is suitable for the source. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller: a) /DTS SURROUND CD 1 PROGRAM MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD TUNER 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E Press once or more. * Press “0” to select the program No. 10. b) For the programs No. 1, 2 and 3 only, you can select the desired subprogram by pressing the corresponding DSP program selector key once or more. The name of the selected program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen. Program name ● ● CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR DSP 4 DVD/LD DSP MOVIE THEATER 1 Subprogram name DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR Program name Adjust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 46 and 47.) You can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 55 to 59.) Notes ● Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at this time. So, when you select the same input source the next time, the same program will be automatically recalled. ● If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround sound effect. ● When a monaural sound source is played with the program PRO LOGIC (Normal/Enhanced), a proper effect will not be obtained. Moreover, sound may become unnatural depending on the settings of the speaker output modes (1. CENTER SPEAKER to 4. LFE/BASS OUT) in the SET MENU mode. ● When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels may produce an unnatural effect. ● When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used and the EFFECT button also will not function. 44 BASIC OPERATION Note If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS decoded to another disc not encoded with DTS when the red “dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding mode. To play back the disc normally, change the current DTSdecoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector key on the remote controller or the INPUT MODE button on the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off. When you select the program No. 1, 2 or 3, and the input signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital is automatically decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with DTS, DTS is automatically decoded. The following indicators on the display panel show you what sound processing is being made. 1 2 3 DIGITAL 4 5 PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM m To cancel the effect sound The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFCT ON/OFF key on the remote controller make it simple to compare the normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound. To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound, press the EFCT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press the EFCT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time to restore the effect sound. Front panel 1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded. 2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded. 3 Lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is not in 2-channels. 4 Lights up when Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being decoded 5 Lights up when Digital Sound Field Processor is turned on. Notes Dolby Digital will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded with Dolby Digital. DTS will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded with DTS. Remote control EFFECT EFCT or ON/OFF Notes ● If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, signals of all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers. ● The display panel or the monitor screen will show the selected subprogram according to the type of the decoding. English m To enjoy a video source encoded with Dolby Pro Logic Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS If the EFFECT button or the EFCT ON/OFF key is pressed to turn effect sounds off when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, press the EFFECT button or the EFCT ON/OFF key to turn effect sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. ● ● If the input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals. 45 BASIC OPERATION Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and subwoofer You can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker even if the output level is already set in “Speaker balance adjustment” on pages 30 to 32. CENTER 46 (Center speaker output level) R SUR. (Right rear speaker output level) L SUR. (Left rear speaker output level) SWFR (Subwoofer output level) Speakers Control range (dB) Preset value CENTER RIGHT SURROUND (R SUR.) LEFT SURROUND (L SUR.) SUBWOOFER (SWFR) MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to 0 0 0 0 0 BASIC OPERATION English m Method of adjustment Select “AMP/TUN.” POWER NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VCR REC VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR POWER l6 20 l2 28 STANDBY ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TV / AMP/TUN TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 2 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B A 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 EDIT TUNING MODE –dB FM/AM 2 DOWN TUNING UP DIR A INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l LEVEL SET MENU DIR B 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE 1 2 1 SELECT VIDEO AUX EFFECT DVD/LD MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD TUNER 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR 1 ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU 1 Select the speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust by using one of the following methods. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller: ON/OFF TITLE LEVEL SET MENU ON/OFF Press once. LEVEL TITLE LEVEL Press once or more. Press once or more. DIR A SELECT DIR B Press once or more. Press a button repeatedly until the name of the desired speaker(s) appears on the display. 2 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s). LEVEL SET MENU DIR A 3 DIR B Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make adjustments on the other speaker(s). Notes ● If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● SELECT Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the same in all the digital sound field programs. ● The value of each speaker output level you set the last time will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected for more than one week, these values will be automatically changed to the factory default settings. 47 BASIC OPERATION Brief overview of digital sound field programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment. Note The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are listening in. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments. m Program No. 1 to 5: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources) ● These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder. ● Speaker output: main, center, rear Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from the center speaker(s). ● Program No. 1 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 1 PROGRAM /DTS SURROUND SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) FEATURE PRO LOGIC/Normal ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. DIGITAL ) DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS DIGITAL SUR/Normal ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS DIGITAL SUR/Enhanced DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 48 Ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding are precisely performed without altering the originally designed sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION Program No. 2 to 3 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 2 PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) 70 mm Spectacle DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. English ● FEATURE Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, giving both the video and the sound field incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions) are ideal for use with this program. DGTL Spectacle DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Spectacle DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 70 mm Sci-Fi DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL Sci-Fi DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DTS Sci-Fi DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 3 MOVIE THEATER 2 70 mm Adventure DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL Adventure DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Adventure DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 70 mm General DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL General DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. The data of the sound field of an opera house are used for the front presence side, so the three dimensional feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert hall on the rear surround side, powerful reverberations are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure movies, etc. with much presence. This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The front presence side of the sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. DTS General DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 49 BASIC OPERATION ● For program No. 4 and 5 only, indicators light up as follows. DSP When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( DSP When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) DIGITAL PROGRAM No. DSP ) FEATURE 4 MONO MOVIE This program is designed specifically to enhance mono source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old mono movies, news broadcasts and dialog. 5 TV SPORTS This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This program is the most suitable for sports programs. m Program No. 6 to 10: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources) ● ● ● DSP When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) Speaker output: main, rear When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( Speaker output: main, center, rear DSP When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) Speaker output: main, center, rear PROGRAM No. 50 DIGITAL DSP ) FEATURE 6 DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 7 ROCK CONCERT This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a very dynamic or lively sound field. 8 JAZZ CLUB This is a small, cozy jazz club with a low ceiling. The sound is very close and intimate. 9 CHURCH This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides. This interior produces very long reverberations. 10 CONCERT HALL In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the main speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience. Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field. “SET MENU” mode The following 13 functions maximize the performance of your system and increase the enjoyment of audio listening and video watching. 6. DOLBY DGTL SET LFE LEVEL 7. DOLBY DGTL SET DYNAMIC RANGE 8. DTS SET LFE LEVEL 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL English ADVANCED FEATURES 19. CENTER DELAY 10. PARAMETER INI 11. MEMORY GUARD 12. TV/DBS INPUT 13. DIMMER m Changes and adjustments Select “AMP/TUN” or “DSP”. POWER NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER VCR REC VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 POWER TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B 8 4 40 STANDBY/ON TV / STANDBY AMP/TUN 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B A 3 4 2 5 3 4 4 5 5 TUNING MODE –dB FM/AM 2 DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE 2 AUTO/MAN’L MONO BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 4 5 EDIT LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 3 4 PROGRAM DIR A 4 L5 5R S VIDEO VIDEO SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO L AUDIO R /DTS SURROUND CD 1 2 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD TUNER ON/OFF 3 TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU 2 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR 1 1 ● Refer to the information in the display panel or monitor screen during operation. The monitor power must be turned on to display information on the monitor. ● When using the remote controller, the selector dial must be set at “AMP/TUN” or “DSP”. 1 To make changes, select the applicable function by using one of the following methods. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller: AUDIO MENU LEVEL SET MENU AUDIO Press once. SET MENU MENU SET MENU Press once or more. Press once or more. DIR A 2 Press once or more. Select the desired position or edit parameter for the function by using the following keys. LEVEL SET MENU DIR A 3 SELECT DIR B SELECT DIR B Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change a setting or adjust for another function. 51 ADVANCED FEATURES m Function description 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL (Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system) Refer to pages 27 to 29 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change, unless your speaker system is modified.) 6. DOLBY DGTL SET LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] ● Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 7. DOLBY DGTL SET DYNAMIC RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range) ● Choices: MAX/STD/MIN Preset position: MAX ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is decoded. “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost among noises in your environment. Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the data of sound. 52 MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds like a movie theater. Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can listen to a source in a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. STD (Standard): In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source suitable for low level listening. MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a source in an extremely low level. * In this position, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, select the MAX or STD position. ADVANCED FEATURES ● Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS contain LFE signals. English 8. DTS SET LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 9. CENTER DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)] ● Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step) Preset value: 0 ms ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center channel signals. Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated. In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to your listening position may be shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that case, sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by delaying the sound from the center speaker. 10. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program) You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program. Note that some DSP programs have two subprograms; all parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this operation. Initializing method Use the remote controller for the operation. A program number whose parameters has been changed is marked with “ ”. First press the DSP key, and then press a DSP program selector key which corresponds to the program number whose parameters you want to initialize. When initialized, the “ ” mark will disappear. * * Note When the selector dial of the remote controller is set at “DSP”, simply press the corresponding DSP program selector key. 53 ADVANCED FEATURES 11. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments) If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters and other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position, they are locked and cannot be changed. The following functions on this unit can be locked by this operation. • • • • • DSP parameters Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode ON SCREEN display key LEVEL key TEST key 12. TV/DBS INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals) For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this unit, you can designate the input mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit is switched on. AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always selected when the power of this unit is switched on. LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the last time is memorized and will not be changed even if the power of this unit is switched off. * Refer to page 36 for details about switching the input mode. 13. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel) You can adjust the brightness of the display panel in five degree increments. 54 ADVANCED FEATURES English Creating your own sound fields What is a sound field? In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we need to first understand what a sound field really is. What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains. The elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: (1) Early Reflections. Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 57 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. (2) Reverberations. These are caused by reflections from more than one surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP reproduces in order to create sound fields. DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing values of parameters, however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Even if the power cord of this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet, your custom sound fields will remain in the DSP’s memory for about one week. The following page details how to make your own sound fields. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. For the programs which have subprograms, each subprogram has a set of parameters. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the “early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. Refer to “Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters” on pages 57 to 59 for a description of what each parameter does, how it effects the sound, and its control range. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the DSP. 55 ADVANCED FEATURES m Selecting and editing program parameters This adjustment can be made only by using the remote controller and watching the monitor screen or the display panel. INDEX CD MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 POWER 3 VCR REC TV ON SCREEN JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 7 8 HALL EXT. DEC. A/B / +10 CHURCH DIR A 9 TEST 2 TV INPUT 5 ROCK PHONO 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER 1 Note Information on the monitor screen would be easier to see than the display panel. DISP SLEEP /DTS SURROUND SELECT DIR B 4, 5 +100 CLEAR SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO ENTER 3 1 Set the selector dial of the remote controller to “DSP” or “AMP/TUN”. POWER DSP or AMP/TUN A/B/C/D/E DSP DISC SKIP PRESET 4 EFCT ON/OFF ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU Select the parameter which you want to edit. STANDBY AMP/TUN DIR A 2 Turn on your monitor. If the currently selected type of display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN display key and select the full display. 5 SELECT DIR B Change the value on the selected parameter to create the effect you want. INDEX DISP ON SCREEN DIR A 3 Select the desired program (or subprogram) by following the steps 2 and 3 of “Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP)” on pages 43 and 44. DSP AMP/TUN DSP /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS DIR B “ ” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “ ” decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases you can hold the key down to quickly move to the desired value. The display will pause for a moment at the initial set value of the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, the mark at the head of the parameter name will disappear upon reaching the initial set value of the parameter.) * VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 ENTER A/B/C/D/E CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E The selected program name and its parameters will be displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped cursor points to the first parameter or subprogram name. 56 SELECT Notes ● For details about parameters, refer to pages 57 to 59. ● Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even if power is lost due to a power failure or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet for up to about one week, after which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values or conditions. ADVANCED FEATURES English m Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ● ROOM SIZE P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger the value, the larger the simulated room will sound. Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound source. What it Does: Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before the subsequent, dense reverberation begins. S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 Standard setting is 1.0. Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all doubled). Level Level Direct sound Early reflections Level Direct sound Direct sound Early reflections Small Early reflections Large Time Small space Time Time Large space ● INIT. DELAY (Initial Delay) P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound. Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective surface determines the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the sound source within the acoustic environment. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds What it Does: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an echo effect. Level Level Control Range: 1 – 49 milliseconds Direct sound Early reflections Small INIT. DLY Time Level Large INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Time 57 ADVANCED FEATURES ● LIVENESS LIVENESS (Presence Liveness) How it Affects the Sound: This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls in the hall. Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front presence sound field becomes. The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity (decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear surround sound field becomes. What it Does: Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control Range: 0 – 10. Level Level Small Large Time Dead Level Direct sound Time Live Time ● REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) How it Affects the Sound: Control Range: The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. 1.0 – 5.0 seconds. The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2 and 3. What it Does: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz). Level Level 60 dB Direct sound Level Early reflections Small 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations 58 Large 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations REV. TIME Reverberations Time ADVANCED FEATURES This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. English ● REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Direct sound REV. LEVEL Time ● S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the later the surround sound field is generated. Control Range: When Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded: 15 – 30 milliseconds When Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded: 0 – 15 milliseconds When a program without Dolby Surround or DTS encoded is used: 15 – 49 milliseconds 59 ADVANCED FEATURES Setting the SLEEP timer Use the built-in SLEEP timer to automatically turn this unit into the standby mode after the time you set elapses. The SLEEP timer is useful when you plan to fall asleep while this unit is playing back or recording a source. The SLEEP timer also automatically turns off external units connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear of this unit. The SLEEP timer can only be set using the remote controller. To set the SLEEP time 1 2 To cancel the SLEEP timer Select the source using the INPUT SELECTOR and start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source unit. Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until the desired SLEEP time appears on the display. * “SLEEP time” is the time that elapses before this unit is automatically turned into the standby mode. Indicates the SLEEP time. DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR SLEEP Flashes. Each time you press the SLEEP key, the SLEEP time changes as follows. (Minutes) 90 60 30 SLEEP OFF (The SLEEP timer is off.) After a while, the display returns to the original indication. 60 SLEEP Note The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote controller) or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. SLEEP 120 Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. (After a while, the display returns to the original indication.) REMOTE CONTROLLER English The remote controller is designed to control the most commonly used functions. If you have other Yamaha audio and video components with remote control capability, this remote controller will also control various functions of them. In addition, this remote controller can control other manufacturers’ audio and video components by programming the remote controller with the codes for other manufacturers. Basic operation 1 Select the position for the component that you want to control by turning the selector dial. Note: Turn the selector dial unitl it stops with a click. POWER 2 Press an operation key. Note: Press a key with the remote controller aimed at the front panel. STANDBY Selected position is shown. AMP/TUN The indicator will flash when a key is pressed. Components which can be controlled The selector dial can be turned to select nine positions. The components which can be controlled with the remote controller differs depending on the selected position. Refer to the diagram below to know what components can be controlled for each position. AMP/TUN POWER STANDBY AMP/TUN /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER TAPE/MD MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 CD DISCO TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 5 DSP DVD/LD DVDMENU VCR CBL/DBS TV AMP/TUN This unit can be controlled. Normally set to this position TAPE/MD Tape decks and MD recorders can be controlled. * Keys are originally preset to control Yamaha tape decks. To control a Yamaha MD recorder, enter the code for Yamaha MD recorders. CD CD players can be controlled. * Keys are originally preset to control Yamaha CD players. DSP This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. DVD/LD DVD players and LD players can be controlled. * To control the Yamaha model DVD-1000 or DVD-S700, enter the code number “4490”. DVD MENU DVD players can be controlled. * A code for a DVD player cannot be entered in this position. VCR VCRs can be controlled. CBL/DBS Cable TVs or DBS tuners can be controlled. TV TVs can be controlled. Notes ● You can program the remote controller with the codes for other manufactures for all positions (except AMP/TUN and DSP) respectively. For example, if your CD player is not a Yamaha model, enter the code for the manufacture of the CD player when the CD position is selected. You can control your CD player with the remote controller when the CD position is selected. You can enter one code for one position. Refer to page 67 for details about entering codes. ● Some Yamaha CD players and tape decks cannot be controlled with the default codes. To control such a model, enter the code for the model in the corresponding position. ● For the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions: If you enter a code for a DVD player in the DVD/LD position, the keys in the DVD MENU position become also available for controlling the DVD player. You cannot enter a code for a DVD player when the DVD MENU is selected. ● You can enter the code for your second (or third) VCR in the CBL/DBS position if you do not use a cable TV, DBS tuner, etc. You can also enter the code for your second (or third) VCR in the DVD MENU position if you do not use a DVD player. In this case, however, you must enter a code for an LD player in the DVD/LD position even if you do not use an LD player. Refer to page 67 for details. 61 REMOTE CONTROLLER Key name and function The key functions differ depending on the position selected by the selector dial as shown below. m AMP/TUN AMP/TUN * The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. 1 POWER Press this key to turn on the power of this unit. POWER 1 STANDBY AMP/TUN /DTS SURROUND CD 1 2 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 3 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER C MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH D E F 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E 5 6 DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH B ON/OFF (TV VOLUME) 8 CODE SET MUTE VOLUME 9 INDEX POWER VCR REC (TV POWER) 0 A DISP SLEEP TV DIR A ON SCREEN SELECT 3 EXT. DEC. Press this key to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function takes priority over the input selector key setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel. The source selected with the input selector keys becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated on the display panel. * If the DSP key (5) is pressed, you can select the HALL program by pressing this key while the indicator (C) is illuminated. 4 A/B/C/D/E Press this key to select a group of preset stations. RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU 5 DSP Press this key. While the indicator (C) is illuminated for about three seconds, select a DSP program using the keys (2, 3, D). No DSP program can be selected after the indicator goes off. 6 PRESET +/– +: –: DIR B SET UP ON/OFF G TV INPUT A/B / Press a key to select the input source. CH TV 7 2 Input selector keys Press this key to select the next preset station number. Press this key to select the previous preset station number. 7 VOLUME (up)/ (down) Press these keys to increase or decrease the volume. H 8 MUTE Press this key to mute the volume. The volume can be returned to the original level by pressing any remote controller key which controls this unit. The indicator on the VOLUME control flashes during the mute mode. 9 SLEEP Press this key to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and set the SLEEP time. (Refer to page 60.) 0 Note TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have entered the code for your TV. 62 / / / The (up) and (down) keys select the DSP parameters, or select speaker(s) or functions according to the mode selected by the LEVEL or SET MENU key. The and keys adjust or make changes in the selected parameter, speaker(s) or function. REMOTE CONTROLLER B STANDBY Press this key to set this unit in the standby mode. C Indicator This indicator flashes when a key is pressed on the remote controller. (Transmitting infrared signals.) D CHURCH If the DSP key (5) is pressed, you can select the CHURCH program by pressing this key while the indicator (C) is illuminated. F EFCT ON/OFF Press this key to turn on/off the digital sound field processor, which includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. English A LEVEL This key is used to adjust the output level of the center speaker, rear speakers and subwoofer. First, press this key. Then select the speaker(s) by pressing this key repeatedly or by using the or key (0). The name will be illuminated on the display. Then press the or key (0) to change the output level. G ON SCREEN Press this key to change the type of display on the monitor screen. Three types of displays are available. Each time the key is pressed, the information can be changed to a full, simple and no display. H SET MENU Press this key to turn the unit into the SET MENU mode. Select a function by pressing this key repeatedly or by using the or key (0). The function name will be illuminated on the display. Then press the or key (0) to adjust or make settings in the function. E TEST This key is used when adjusting the speaker balance. (Refer to pages 30 to 32.) m DSP DSP POWER STANDBY The functions of all keys are the same with the AMP/TUN position except the DSP program selector keys figured on the left. DSP DSP program selector keys Press a key corresponding to the DSP program you want to select. The program is directly selected. Note: Press “0” to select the program No. 10. /DTS SURROUND CD 1 DSP program selector keys MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER 63 REMOTE CONTROLLER The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. For the keys which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 62. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each of your components. m TAPE/MD TAPE/MD 1 POWER For tape decks 1 POWER STANDBY This key turns on this unit when the default code is used. If another code is entered and your tape deck’s remote controller has a power key, this key will turn on the tape deck. TAPE/MD 2 /DTS SURROUND CD 1 INPUT MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER REC/PAUSE Press this key to set the tape deck in the recording pause mode. MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 3 DIR A CHURCH 9 TEST Press this key to select the playing direction of DECK A. +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP DISC SKIP PRESET CH 4 EFCT ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) PLAY Press this key to play a tape. CODE SET 5 MUTE VOLUME (TV POWER) 4 2 3 5 INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER VCR REC TV DIR A ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU 6 7 8 9 0 A REWIND Press this key to rewind a tape. 7 DECK A/B Press this key to select A or B on a double cassette tape deck. 9 DIR B Press this key to select the playing direction of DECK B. 0 STOP Press this key to stop a tape. A FAST FORWARD Press this key to fast forward a tape. Note TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have entered the code for your TV. For MD recorders Enter the proper code for your MD recorder. 1 POWER This key turns on this unit if a code for a Yamaha MD recorder is entered. If another manufactuer’s code is entered and your MD recorder’s remote controller has a power key, this key will turn on the MD recorder. 2 REC/PAUSE 3 SKIP 4 PLAY 5 BACKWARD 6 DISPLAY 8 PAUSE 9 SKIP 0 STOP A FAST FORWARD 64 REMOTE CONTROLLER m CD CD 1 Note TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have entered the code for your TV. POWER STANDBY 1 POWER CD /DTS SURROUND TAPE/MD TUNER 1 This key turns on this unit when the default code is used. If another code is entered and your CD player’s remote controller has a power key, this key will turn on the CD player. MOVIE THEATER 2 MOVIE THEATER 1 CD INPUT 3 2 MONO MOVIE DISCO DVD/LD VCR TV SPORTS TV/DBS 4 6 5 ROCK PHONO V-AUX 9 8 HALL EXT. DEC. TEST +100 +10 0 2 DISC SKIP CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 7 Press these keys to skip to the next or previous CD. CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP 2 EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) CODE SET MUTE VOLUME (TV INPUT) INDEX (TV POWER) DISP SLEEP POWER ON SCREEN TV VCR REC TV INPUT A/B / 3 4 5 DIR A DIR B SELECT SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ON/OFF ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU m DVD/LD 3 , SKIP Press to skip to the beginning of the next track. Press to skip to the beginning of the current or previous track. 6 4 7 5 7 STOP Press this key to stop playback. This key functions as PAUSE/STOP for operating Yamaha CD players under default settings. 8 FAST FORWARD Press this key to advance playback rapidly. BACKWARD Press this key to reverse playback rapidly. 8 m DVD MENU (*1) POWER 6 PAUSE Press this key to pause playback. This key functions as PAUSE/STOP for operating Yamaha CD players under default settings. PLAY Press this key to play a CD. DVD/LD POWER STANDBY (*1): For a DVD player: This key turns on this unit when the default code is used. /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD V-AUX 8 +10 CD 1 MONO MOVIE Numeric keys VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB /DTS SURROUND 3 DISCO TV SPORTS CHURCH DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 9 7 TEST HALL +100 EXT. DEC. CLEAR 0 ENTER EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET DISC SKIP CH ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) CODE SET +10 DISC SKIP INDEX (TV POWER) VCR REC TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD) 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) (TV INPUT) TITLE/INDEX VOLUME INDEX DISP SLEEP (TV POWER) POWER VCR REC TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU STOP ANGLE (DVD) AUDIO (DVD) Note TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have entered the code for your TV. MENU LEFT MENU SELECT SET UP TITLE DIR A SET UP SUBTITLE ON/OFF (TV INPUT) A/B / PAUSE DIR A CLEAR CLEAR A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY A/B SKIP/SEARCH PLAY SUBTITLE (DVD)/ BACKWARD (LD) VCR CODE SET DISP / 3 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS MUTE VOLUME POWER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 DSP MUTE SLEEP MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP STANDBY DVDMENU For an CD player: This key turns on this unit if a code for a Yamaha LD player is entered. 2 TV/DBS DVDMENU POWER POWER DVD/LD INPUT English The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. For the keys which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 62. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each of your components. SELECT DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RETURN MENU Note TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have entered the code for your TV. 65 REMOTE CONTROLLER The keys drawn in a light tone do not function. For the keys which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 62. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each of your components. m VCR m TV VCR Note TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have entered the code for your TV. POWER POWER TV Note You can control your VCR if you have entered the code for it. POWER STANDBY STANDBY TV VCR /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE CHANNEL DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL +(UP)/–(DOWN) 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SURROUND TAPE/MD CD 3 1 2 CHANNEL DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR V-AUX 6 8 +10 7 TEST ENTER EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) CODE SET VOLUME VCR REC (*1) PLAY INDEX POWER VCR REC TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / DISPLAY (TV INPUT) CHURCH 9 8 TEST +100 +10 0 TV EFFECT ON/OFF CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV SUBTITLE ON/OFF MUTE VOLUME INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER VCR REC TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / SELECT DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU DIR A STOP SET UP FAST FORWARD TV INPUT RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU CBL/DBS POWER POWER STANDBY CBL/DBS Note TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have entered the code for your TV. /DTS SURROUND CD 1 CHANNEL MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL +(UP)/–(DOWN) 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) CODE SET MUTE VOLUME INDEX DISP SLEEP (TV POWER) MENU SELECT MENU LEFT POWER VCR REC TV DIR A SUBTITLE ON/OFF SELECT DISPLAY ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / SET UP 66 DISPLAY DIR B SELECT (*1) Press this key twice to start recording. m CBL/DBS TV VOLUME CODE SET PAUSE DIR A SET UP REWIND DISP SLEEP 6 5 V-AUX EXT. DEC. CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL +(UP)/–(DOWN) TV MUTE TV SLEEP TV POWER CLEAR VCR JAZZ CLUB HALL +100 MUTE (TV POWER) 4 3 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS ROCK PHONO 9 A/B/C/D/E DSP CH MONO MOVIE CHURCH MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 DVD/LD 5 JAZZ CLUB MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU (TV INPUT) MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RECALL MENU (VCR) REMOTE CONTROLLER English Entering manufacturer codes If you have a component which is not a Yamaha model, you can enter the code for the manufacturer of the component in the corresponding position of the selector dial. By doing so, you can control the component with the remote controller. Refer to the code list at the end of this manual for the code numbers you need. Notes ● Some Yamaha CD players and tape decks cannot be controlled with the default codes. To control such a model, enter the code for the model in the corresponding position. ● If there is no code applicable for your component in the code list, you must use the remote controller provided for the component. Entering a code 1 Entering a code for a second (or third) VCR Set the selector dial to the position for controlling the component. (For example, set to “VCR” for a VCR.) POWER STANDBY VCR /DTS SURROUND CD 2 MOVIE THEATER 1 You can use the CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position, or both of them to control a second (and/or third) VCR if you do not use a cable TV, DBS tuner, DVD player etc. * If you will use the DVD MENU position for a second (or third) VCR, you must enter the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD position. 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the same time and hold them until the indicator flashes twice. Set the selector dial to the CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position. POWER STANDBY DVDMENU TV POWER STANDBY CODE SET VCR MUTE /DTS SURROUND Flashes twice. VOLUME CD 2 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the same time and hold them until the indicator flashes twice. TV POWER STANDBY CODE SET DVDMENU MUTE Flashes twice. VOLUME /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD POWER STANDBY 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 VCR Flashes twice. CLEAR ENTER 3 TV Press the MUTE key. CODE SET A/B/C/D/E MUTE VOLUME * If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and enter the code again. 4 Try operating the component with the remote controller to check the code entering is successful. 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the second (or third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. /DTS SURROUND CD Note If the component cannot be controlled, enter another code for the same manufacturer. 1 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD POWER STANDBY 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 DVDMENU Flashes twice. CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E * If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 4 and enter the code again. 5 Try operating the component with the remote controller to check the code entering is successful. Note If the component cannot be controlled, enter another code for the same manufacturer. 67 REMOTE CONTROLLER Restoring the default codes To restore the default codes for the all positions. 1 Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the same time and hold them until the indicator flashes twice. Flashes twice. To restore the default code for each position 1 Set the selector dial to the position for which you want to restore the default code. TV CODE SET POWER POWER STANDBY DVDMENU STANDBY MUTE DVDMENU VOLUME /DTS SURROUND CD 2 2 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD Press both of the VOLUME and keys at the same time and hold them until the indicator flashes twice. Enter the code number “9987”. * Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. TV /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER 4 CODE SET STANDBY VCR 6 DVDMENU CHURCH V-AUX 8 EXT. DEC. +10 0 STANDBY DVDMENU Flashes twice. 5 JAZZ CLUB 7 HALL POWER MUTE DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS ROCK PHONO POWER 3 2 MONO MOVIE DVD/LD MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 9 TEST +100 Flashes twice. VOLUME CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E 3 Enter the code number “9999”. * Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. /DTS SURROUND CD 1 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER DVD/LD 4 7 POWER STANDBY 3 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR DVDMENU 6 5 ROCK PHONO MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 MONO MOVIE JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 HALL EXT. DEC. +10 0 Flashes twice. CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E Default codes The following codes are preset as the default code. <U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models> Position Component <Australia model> Code Position Component TV TV 0047 TV TV 0037 CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2566 CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2455 VCR VCR 3060 VCR VCR 3072 DVD/LD DVD player 4545 YAMAHA DVD/LD DVD player 4545 YAMAHA CD CD player 6187 YAMAHA CD CD player 6187 YAMAHA TAPE/MD Tape deck 8524 YAMAHA TAPE/MD Tape deck 8524 YAMAHA We recommend that you write all code numbers you have entered on the “Quick Reference Card”. 68 Code Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English TROUBLESHOOTING General Problem Cause What to Do The unit fails to turn on when the STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns into the standby mode suddenly soon after the power is turned on. Power cord is not plugged in or is not completely inserted. Firmly plug in the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not set to either end. Set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. This unit does not work normally. There is an influence of strong external noise (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while using this unit. Turn this unit into the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate this unit again. No sound or no picture. Incorrect output cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Appropriate input source is not selected. Select the appropriate input source with the INPUT SELECTOR or the TAPE/MD MON/EXT. DECODER button. Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. Digital signals other than PCM audio and Dolby Digital (or DTS) encoded signals which this unit cannot reproduce are input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. No picture There is no S video terminal connection between this unit and the TV, though S video signals are input to this unit. Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of short circuit etc. Turn this unit into the standby mode, and then turn on to reset the protection circuit. The SLEEP timer came on. Cancel the SLEEP timer function. Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control. Adjust it to the appropriate position. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. The EFFECT button is set off. Press the EFFECT button to turn it on. A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS). Use a different sound field program. The function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE” position. Select the appropriate position. One of the DSP programs No. 6 to No. 10 is selected when the input signal of source is 2-channel stereo (analog/PCM). Select another program. The input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center channel signals. Refer to the instructions for the source currently played. The function “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode is set in the SW or BOTH position, though your system does not include a subwoofer. Select the MAIN position. Output mode selection for each channel (MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper. Make output mode selections suitable for your speaker system. Incorrect cord connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The player should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or sound is distorted. The component connected to the TAPE/MD OUT terminals of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. Only one side speaker outputs the sound. No sound from the effect speakers. No sound from the center speaker. Poor bass reproduction. Sound “hums”. 69 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause What to Do DSP parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. The function “11. MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position. Set to the “OFF” position. “INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display and no sound is heard. A nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is misoperating. Check the source, or turn off the unit playing back the source and then turn on again. The sound field cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound field on a tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE/MD OUT terminals. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or power supply with low voltage. Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC outlet, and then plug in again after about one minute. A source cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. The source unit is connected to this unit between digital terminals only. Make additional connection between analog terminals. Noise from nearby TV or tuner. This unit is too close to the affected equipment. Move the unit further away from the affected equipment. The sound is degraded when listening with the headphones connected to the compact disc player or tape deck that is connected with this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn the power to this unit on. Remote controller Problem What to Do The batteries of this remote controller are weak. Replace the batteries with new ones. The remote controller does not function properly. Wrong distance or angle. The remote controller will function from a maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the main unit. Change position of the main unit. The selector dial of the remote controller is not set at the proper position. Set the selector dial to the proper position. The code for controlling the component is not preset to the remote controller. Enter the code for controlling the component in the corresponding position of the remote controller. This unit or another component cannot be controlled with the remote controller. 70 Cause The remote controller does not work. TROUBLESHOOTING FM Problem Cause What to Do FM stereo reception is noisy. Because of the characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts, this is limited to cases where the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high quality directional FM antenna. Set the TUNING MODE button to the manual tuning mode. There is distortion and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust antenna placement to eliminate multipath interference. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been unplugged for a long period. Repeat the presetting procedure. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. Weak signal or loose antenna connections. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and rotate it for best reception. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat but it is difficult to eliminate all the noises. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A television set is being used nearby. Relocate this unit away from the TV. English Tuner AM Use the manual tuning method. <For China and General models only> Although you make the operation for recalling a preset station, the station cannot be tuned in, or a station other than the preset one is tuned in. Some memory of the preset stations was modified because the setting of the FREQUENCY STEP switch was changed after storing stations. Repeat storing stations by following the preset tuning procedure. When playing back a source encoded with DTS: Problem Cause What to Do The player which plays back the source is not connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit. The player must be connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit besides analog audio signal terminal connections. The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on this unit. Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn on the DTS decoder built into this unit. A percussive noise is heard when you begin playing back a source encoded with DTS. If the “AUTO” input mode is selected, depending on some sources, there may be a case that a noise is heard while this unit is identifying the format of input signal. Set the input mode of the currently selected input source to “DTS”. No sound is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS, even though the “AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected on this unit. The DTS decoder built into this unit does not function because the player has a digital volume control and it is set at a position other than “maximum”, “neutral” or “ineffective”. Set the player’s digital volume control at the maximum, neutral or ineffective position. No sound is heard when you play back an MD onto which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto an MD. No sound is heard when you play back a DAT onto which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. Depending on a DAT deck, a source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto a DAT. No sound is heard when you play back a source (CD etc.) even though the currently selected input mode is “AUTO”. In the “AUTO” mode, DTS-decoding mode cannot be changed to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode automatically. A loud hissing noise is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS. Press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector button (for the currently selected source) on the remote controller so that “PCM” appears on the monitor screen. Notes • It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D-to-A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard. • If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode to prevent a noise from being output. • A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a source encoded with DTS cannot be played back. The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback). 71 SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel (Power Amp. Section) (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 85W+85W 1 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms ............................................ 100W+100W CENTER 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms .......................................................... 85W 1 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms ............ 100W REAR L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms .................................................85W+85W 1 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms .............................................100W+100W Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models only] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R ................................125W+125W CENTER.............................................125W REAR L/R ...............................125W+125W Dynamic Power Per Channel (by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method) MAIN L/R (8 ohms/6 ohms/4 ohms/2 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ..................................115W/140W/170W/200W Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models only] MAIN L/R (8 ohms) .......................... 1.31 dB DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel [Europe, U.K. and Singapore models only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ..... 130W IEC Power [Europe, U.K. and Singapore models only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ....... 95W Power Band Width 8 ohms, 40W, 0.09% THD (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R .........................10 Hz to 50 kHz Damping Factor (SPEAKER A) MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms) ..................................................... 80 or more Input Sensitivity/Impedance CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR /VIDEO AUX ................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms PHONO MM ......................2.5 mV/47 k-ohms Maximum Input Signal CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR /VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON) (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................... 2.2V or more PHONO MM (1 kHz, 0.04% THD) ............................................ 110 mV or more 72 Output Level/Impedance REC OUT ....................... 150 mV/1.0 k-ohms PRE OUT ............................ 2.6V/1.1 k-ohms SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL) ............................................ 4.0V/1.2 k-ohms Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance Output Level CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR /VIDEO AUX Input: 1 kHz, 150 mV, RL=8 ohms ........................ 0.55V Impedance .................................... 390 ohms Gain Tracking Error (0 to –60 dB) MAIN L/R ....................................3 dB or less VIDEO SECTION Video Signal Type [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................NTSC [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] .................................................. PAL [China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL Video Signal Level ................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR /VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT ........................................................ 0±0.5 dB RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO MM ....................................0±0.5 dB S-Video Signal Level Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms Maximum Input Level ........... 1.5 Vp-p or more Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............... 50 dB or more Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR/VIDEO AUX to MAIN SP OUT, 40W/8 ohms .............................................. 0.025% or less PHONO MM to REC OUT, 1V ................................................ 0.02% or less Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR/VIDEO AUX to SP OUT (Input Shorted 150 mV) (EFFECT OFF) ...................... 96 dB or more PHONO MM to REC OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .................................86 dB or more [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] .................................82 dB or more Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R SP OUT ................. 170 µV or less Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB, EFFECT OFF) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 k-ohms Shorted 1 kHz/10 kHz ........................................ 60/45 dB or more PHONO MM Input Shorted 1 kHz/10 kHz .........................................60/55 dB or more Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB (50 Hz) Turnover frequency ........................ 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±10 dB (20 kHz) Turnover frequency ....................... 3.5 kHz Bass Extension (MAIN L/R) .......+6 dB (50 Hz) Filter Characteristics MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R (MAIN, CENTER, REAR SP: SMALL) (H.P.F.) .......................fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct. SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.) .................................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct. Monitor Out Frequency Response ..................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Europe, U.K., Australia, China, Singapore and General models] ........87.5 to 108.0 MHz 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms, 100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] Mono.................................1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) Stereo ................................23 µV (38.5 dBf) Usable Sensitivity (75 ohms) [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models only] DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) .....................0.9 µV DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB).....................28 µV Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only]..........................................75 dB Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz) [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models only] .........................................55 dB Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]..........................................81/75 dB (DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models]..........................................75/69 dB SPECIFICATIONS Usable Sensitivity ..............................300 µV/m Stereo Separation (1 kHz).......................48 dB Signal-to-Noise Ratio ..............................52 dB Frequency Response 20 Hz to 15 kHz ..................................0±1 dB Output Level (30% mod., 1 kHz) .........150 mV Output Level (100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...........................................................550 mV [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models (40 kHz Dev.)] ......................550 mV GENERAL AM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ........................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ...............................531 to 1,611 kHz Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................. AC 120V/60 Hz [Europe, U.K. and Singapore models] ............................................. AC 230V/50 Hz [Australia model] .................. AC 240V/50 Hz [China and General models] .................. AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ..................................... 310W [Europe, U.K., Australia, China, Singapore and General models] ............................350W [Canada model]........................350W/440 VA Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] ...........................690W AC Outlets 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS [U.S.A., Europe, Canada, China, Singapore and General models] ....... 100W max. total 1 SWITCHED OUTLET [U.K. and Australia models] ..... 100W max. English Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) ...............0.1/0.2% Dimensions (W x H x D) ........................................ 435 x 151 x 391 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 15-3/8”) Weight ......................... 13.0 kg (28 lbs. 10 oz) Accessories ..........................Remote controller Batteries AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 73 LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS For U.S.A. and Canada models Modèles pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada SETUP CODES FOR TV Manufacturer Code A-Mark 0003 AOC 0030, 0019, 0003, 0052, 0185 Abex 0032 Acura 0009 Admiral 0093 Adventura 0046 Adyson 0032 Aiko 0092 Akai 0030, 0208 Akura 0264 Alaron 0179, 0216 Alba 0009, 0037 Ambassador 0177 Amstrad 0009, 0171, 0177 Anam 0180, 0004, 0009, 0068 Anam National 0161 Anitech 0009, 0068 Arcam 0216 Archer 0003 Audinac 0391 Audiosonic 0037, 0109 Audiovox 0451, 0180, 0003, 0092 BPL 0282 Basic Line 0009 Baur 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554 Baysonic 0180 Belcor 0019 Bell & Howell 0154, 0016 Beon 0037 Blaupunkt 0535, 0554 Blue Star 0282 Bradford 0180 Brandt 0109 Britannia 0216 Brockwood 0019 Broksonic 0236, 0463, 0003, 0426 Bush 0282, 0009, 0037 CCE 0037 CS Electronics 0216 CXC 0180 Candle 0030, 0056, 0046, 0186 Carnivale 0030 Carver 0054, 0170 Cascade 0009 Cathay 0037 Celebrity 0000 Centurion 0037 Cimline 0009 Cineral 0451, 0092 Citizen 0060, 0030, 0056, 0039, 0046, 0092, 0186, 0280 Clairtone 0185 Clarivox 0037 Concerto 0056 Contec 0180, 0009, 0185, 0216 Craig 0180, 0161 Crosley 0054 Crown 0180, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0418 Curtis Mathes 0047, 0054, 0154, 0051, 0451, 0093, 0060, 0030, 0145, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0166 Daewoo 0451, 0019, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0066, 0092 Dansai 0037 Dayton 0009 Daytron 0019 De Graaf 0208 Decca 0037 Denon 0145 Dixi 0004, 0009, 0037 Dumont 0017, 0019 Ectec 0391 Electroband 0000, 0185 Elin 0037 Elta 0009 Emerson 0154, 0236, 0463, 0180, 0282, 0178, 0019, 0179, 0039, 0177, 0185, 0280 Envision 0030 Erres 0037 Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0287, 0560 Fidelity 0216 Finlandia 0208 Finlux 0179, 0037 Firstline 0009, 0216 Fisher 0154, 0159, 0208 Formenti 0037 Frontech 0264 Fujitsu 0179 Funai 0180, 0179, 0171, 0264 Futuretech 0180 GE 0047, 0051, 0451, 0093, 0282, 0178, 0021, 0135 GEC 0037 Geloso 0009 Gibralter 0017, 0030, 0019 GoldStar 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0001, 0002, 0032, 0037, 0109 Goodmans 0179, 0037 Gradiente 0053, 0056, 0170 Granada 0037, 0208, 0339, 0502 Grandin 0282 Grundig 0037, 0535, 0554 Grunpy 0180, 0179 HCM 0282, 0009 Hallmark 0178 Hanseatic 0037 Harley Davidson 0179 Harvard Hinari Hisawa Hitachi 0180, 0068 0179, 0009, 0037, 0283 0282 0145, 0056, 0032, 0109, 0151, 0576 Huanyu 0216 Hypson 0282, 0037, 0264 ICE 0264 ITT 0283 Imperial 0418 Indiana 0037 Infinity 0054 Inteq 0017 Interbuy 0068 Interfunk 0037, 0512 Intervision 0037, 0068, 0264 JBL 0054 JCB 0000 JEC 0502 JVC 0053, 0069, 0160 Janeil 0046 KEC 0180 KTV 0180, 0030, 0039, 0185, 0280 Kaisui 0282, 0009, 0216 Kamp 0216 Kawasho 0216 Kaypani 0052 Kendo 0037 Kenwood 0030, 0019 Kingsley 0216 Kloss 0046 Korpel 0037 Koyoda 0009 LG 0056 LXI 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178 Leyco 0037, 0264 Liesenk & Tter 0037 Lloytron 0032 Loewe 0512 Logik 0016, 0001 Luxman 0056 M Electronic 0009, 0037, 0068, 0109, 0287 MEI 0185 MGA 0150, 0030, 0178, 0019 MTC 0060, 0030, 0019, 0056, 0185, 0216, 0512 Magnavox 0054, 0030, 0179, 0186, 0187 Majestic 0016 Manesth 0264 Marantz 0054, 0030, 0037 Mark 0037 Matsui 0009, 0035, 0037, 0177, 0208 Matsushita 0250 Mediator 0037 Megatron Memorex 0178, 0145, 0003 0154, 0250, 0150, 0178, 0056, 0016, 0009 Metz 0535 Midland 0047, 0017, 0051, 0039, 0032, 0135 Minerva 0535, 0554 Minutz 0021 Mitsubishi 0093, 0150, 0178, 0019, 0512, 0535 Mivar 0216 Motorola 0093 Multitech 0180, 0009, 0216 NAD 0156, 0178, 0166 NEC 0030, 0019, 0056, 0170 NEI 0037 NTC 0092 Neckermann 0037, 0554 Nesco 0179 Nikkai 0032, 0035, 0037, 0216, 0264 Nikko 0030, 0178, 0092 Nisato 0391 Nordmende 0109, 0287, 0560 Noshi 0018 Onwa 0180 Optimus 0154, 0250, 0166 Optonica 0093, 0165 Orion 0236, 0463, 0179, 0037, 0177 Osaki 0032, 0264 Osume 0032 Otto Versand 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554 Palladium 0418 Panama 0264 Panasonic 0051, 0250, 0226 Pathe Cinema 0216 Pausa 0009 Penney 0047, 0156, 0051, 0060, 0030, 0178, 0021, 0019, 0018, 0056, 0039, 0002, 0003, 0032, 0135, 0149 Phase 0032 Philco 0054, 0463, 0030, 0145, 0019 Philips 0054, 0037, 0554 Phonola 0037 Pilot 0030, 0019, 0039 Pioneer 0109, 0166, 0287 Portland 0019, 0039, 0092 Prism 0051 Profex 0009 Proscan 0047 Protech 0009, 0037, 0264, 0418 Proton 0178, 0003, 0052 Pulsar 0017, 0019 Quasar 0051, 0250, 0165 Quelle 0037, 0252, 0512, 0535, 0554 R-Line 0037 RCA 0047, 0051, 0093, 0019, 0018, 0090, 0135 Radio Shack 0047, 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032 Radiola Realistic 0037 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032 Revox 0037 Rex 0264 Rhapsody 0185, 0216 Roadstar 0009, 0264, 0418 Runco 0017, 0030 SBR 0037 SEG 0264 SEI 0177 SSS 0180, 0019 Saba 0109, 0287 Saisho 0009, 0177, 0264 Sampo 0030, 0039, 0032, 0052 Samsung 0060, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0009, 0032, 0037, 0090, 0264, 0427 Samsux 0039 Sandra 0216 Sansei 0451 Sansui 0463 Sanyo 0154, 0159, 0208, 0339 Schneider 0037 Scimitsu 0019 Scotch 0178 Scott 0236, 0180, 0178, 0019, 0179 Sears 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178, 0179, 0056, 0149, 0159, 0171 Semivox 0180 Semp 0156 Sentra 0035, 0283 Sharp 0093, 0165, 0039 Shogun 0019 Siemens 0037, 0535, 0554 Signature 0016 Simpson 0186, 0187 Sinudyne 0177 Solavox 0032 Sonitron 0208 Sonoko 0009, 0037 Sonolor 0208 Sontec 0037 Sony 0000, 0080 Soundesign 0180, 0178, 0179, 0186 Soundwave 0037, 0418 Spectricon 0003 Squareview 0171 Standard 0009 Starlite 0180 Supra 0056 Supre-Macy 0046 Supreme 0000 Sylvania 0054, 0030 Symphonic 0171 Sysline 0037 TMK 0178, 0056, 0177 Tandy 0093 Tatung 0003, 0037 Technics 0051, 0250 Technol Ace 0179 Techwood Teknika 0051, 0056, 0003 0054, 0180, 0150, 0060, 0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0092, 0186 Telefunken 0056, 0109, 0252 Teletech 0009 Teleton 0186 Texet 0216 Thomson 0109, 0287 Thorn 0035, 0037, 0512, 0535 Tomashi 0282 Toshiba 0154, 0156, 0060, 0035, 0149, 0502 Tosonic 0185 Totevision 0039 Triumph 0177 Ultra 0391 Universum 0037, 0264, 0535 Vector Research 0030 Vestel 0037 Victor 0053 Vidikron 0054 Vidtech 0178, 0019 Viking 0046 Wards 0054, 0165, 0030, 0178, 0021, 0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0080 Watson 0037 White Westinghouse 0037, 0216 Yamaha 0030, 0019 Yoko 0037, 0264 Zenith 0017, 0016, 0092 Zonda 0003 SETUP CODES FOR CABLE Manufacturer Code ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1011 Allegro 1315 Archer 1797 BBT 1267 Belcor 1056 British Telecom 1003 Cable Star 1056 Citizen 1315 Colour Voice 1031 Comtronics 1040 Contec 1019 Emerson 1797 Everquest 1015, 1040 Focus 1400 GC Electronics 1056 Gemini 1015 General Instrument 1476, 1011 GoldStar 1144, 1040 Goodmind 1797 Hamlin 1020, 1259, 1009, 1034 Hitachi 1011 Jasco Jerrold 1315 1003, 1012, 1476, 1014, 1015, 1011, 1024 MNet 1019 Magnavox 1027 Memorex 1000 Movie Time 1063 NSC 1063 Novaplex 1618 Oak 1019 Optimus 1021 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003 Panasonic 1000, 1107, 1021 Paragon 1000 Philips 1027, 1031 Pioneer 1144, 1533 Popular Mechanics 1400 Prelude 1770 Pulsar 1000 RCA 1021 Radio Shack 1015, 1315 Recoton 1400 Regal 1020, 1259 Rembrandt 1011 Runco 1000 SL Marx 1040 Samsung 1144, 1040 Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1477 Signal 1015, 1040 Signature 1011 Sprucer 1021 StarSight 1422 Starcom 1003, 1015 Stargate 1015, 1040, 1770, 1797 Starquest 1015 TV86 1063 TeleCaption 1221 Teleview 1040 Timeless 1418 Tocom 1012 Toshiba 1000 Tusa 1015 United Cable 1003 Universal 1056, 1191 Viewstar 1063, 1027 Zenith 1000, 1054, 1525 Zentek 1400 SETUP CODES FOR DBS TUNER Manufacturer AST Audio Ton Avalon Chaparral Connexions DNT Echostar Elta Expressvu Fuba Galaxis Galaxisat General Instrument Huth JSR JVC Jerrold Lemon NEC Neusat Next-Wave Primestar Radix SAT SatPartner Seemann Triad Wisi Zehnder SETUP CODES FOR VCR Code 2321 2364 2396 2053, 2209 2396 2396 2396 2364 2775 2396 2364 2321 2361 2364 2364 2775 2361 2692 2507 2692 2732 2361 2396 2321 2692 2396 2321 2321, 2396 2321 (DSS) AlphaStar Echostar General Instrument HTS Hitachi Hughes Network System Jerrold Magnavox Memorex Panasonic Philips Primestar RCA Sony Star Choice Toshiba Uniden 2772 2775 2869 2775 2819 2749 2627 2724 2724 2701 2724 2627 2566 2639 2869 2790 2724 Manufacturer Code ASA 3037, 3081 Admiral 3048 Adventura 3000 Aiko 3278 Aiwa 3037, 3000 Akai 3041, 3061, 3281, 3288 Akiba 3072 Akura 3271 Alba 3209, 3072, 3278, 3020, 3295 Ambassador 3020 American High 3035 Amstrad 3000, 3278 Anitech 3072 Asha 3240 Asuka 3037 Audiovox 3037 Baird 3000, 3104, 3041 Basic Line 3072, 3278, 3020 Beaumark 3240 Bell & Howell 3104 Blaupunkt 3162, 3034, 3195, 3226, 3227 Brandt 3187, 3320 Brandt Electronic 3041 Broksonic 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002, 3295, 3361, 3479 Bush 3209, 3072, 3278 CCE 3072, 3278 CGE 3000 Calix 3037 Canon 3035 Capehart 3020 Carver 3081 Catron 3020 Cimline 3072 Cineral 3278 Citizen 3037, 3278 Clatronic 3020 Colt 3072 Condor 3020 Craig 3037, 3047, 3240, 3072, 3271 Crown 3072, 3278, 3020 Curtis Mathes 3060, 3035, 3041, 3162 Cybernex 3240 Cyrus 3081 Daewoo 3045, 3278, 3020 Dansai 3072 Daytron 3020 De Graaf 3042, 3166 Decca 3081, 3000 Denon 3042 Dual 3041 Dumont 3081, 3000, 3104 Dynatech 3000 ESC 3240, 3278 Elbe 3038 Elcatech 3072 Electrohome 3037 Electrophonic 3037 Emerex 3032 Emerson 3037, 3184, 3000, 3121, 3043, 3209, 3002, 3278, 3036, 3061, 3068, 3208, 3212, 3295, 3361, 3479 Ferguson 3041, 3320 Fidelity 3000 Finlandia 3081, 3104 Finlux 3081, 3000, 3042, 3104 Firstline 3037, 3045, 3043, 3209, 3072 Fisher 3047, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066 Frontech 3020 Fuji 3035, 3033 Funai 3000 GE 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3202 GEC 3081 Garrard 3000 General 3020 GoldHand 3072 GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225, 3471 Goodmans 3037, 3000, 3072, 3278, 3062, 3020 Gradiente 3000, 3008 Graetz 3240, 3104, 3041 Granada 3081, 3104, 3046 Grandin 3037, 3000, 3072 Grundig 3081, 3072, 3195, 3226 HCM 3072 HI-Q 3047 Hanseatic 3037 Harley Davidson 3000 Harman/Kardon 3038 Harwood 3072, 3068 Headquarter 3046 Hinari 3240, 3072, 3208 Hitachi 3240, 3000, 3042, 3041, 3166, 3235 Hypson 3072 ITT 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046, 3384 ITV 3037, 3278 Imperial 3000 Interfunk 3081 JVC 3067, 3041, 3008, 3384 Jensen 3041 KEC 3037, 3278 KLH 3072 Kaisui 3072 Kendo 3209 Kenwood 3067, 3041, 3038, 3384 Kodak 3035, 3037 Korpel 3072 LXI 3037 Lenco 3278 Leyco 3072 LIoyd’s 3000, 3208 Loewe 3037, 3081 Logik 3240, 3072 Luxor 3048, 3104, 3043, 3062, 3046 M Electronic 3000 MEI 3035 MGA 3240, 3043, 3061 MGN Technology 3240 MTC 3240, 3000 Magnasonic 3278 Magnavox 3035, 3039, 3081, 3000 Magnin 3240 Manesth 3045, 3072 Marantz 3035, 3081, 3062, 3295 Marta 3037 Matsui 3209, 3036, 3208, 3295 Matsushita 3035, 3162 Memorex 3035, 3037, 3048, 3039, 3047, 3240, 3000, 3104, 3162, 3046 Memphis 3072 Metz 3162, 3195, 3227 Minerva 3195 Minolta 3042 Mitsubishi 3048, 3081, 3067, 3043, 3061, 3173, 3196 Motorola 3035, 3048 Multitech 3000, 3072 Murphy 3000 NEC 3104, 3067, 3041, 3038, 3040 Neckermann 3081 Nesco 3072 Nikko 3037 Nikon 3034 Noblex 3240 Nokia 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046 Nordmende 3041, 3320, 3384 Oceanic 3000, 3041 Olympus 3035, 3226 Optimus 3037, 3048, 3104, 3162 Optonica 3062 Orion 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002, 3036, 3208, 3295, 3479 Osaki 3037, 3000, 3072 Otto Versand 3081 Palladium 3037, 3041, 3072 Panasonic 3035, 3162, 3225, 3226, 3227 Pathe Cinema 3036 Pathe Marconi 3041 Penney 3035, 3037, 3240, 3042, 3038, 3040, 3054 Pentax 3042 Perdio 3000 Philco 3035, 3209, 3038, 3479 Philips 3035, 3081, 3062, 3384 Phonola 3081 Pilot 3037 Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235 Portland 3020 Profitronic 3240 Proline 3000 Proscan 3060, 3202 Protec 3072 Pulsar 3039 Pye Quarter Quartz Quasar Quelle RCA 3081 3046 3046 3035, 3162 3081 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3042, 3202 Radio Shack 3037, 3000 Radiola 3081 Radix 3037 Randex 3037 Realistic 3035, 3037, 3048, 3047, 3000, 3104, 3062, 3046, 3066 Rex 3041, 3384 Ricoh 3034 Roadstar 3037, 3240, 3072, 3278 Runco 3039 SBR 3081 SEG 3240 SEI 3081 STS 3042 Saba 3041, 3320, 3384 Saisho 3209, 3036, 3208 Salora 3043, 3046 Samsung 3240, 3045 Sanky 3048, 3039 Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041, 3271, 3479 Sanyo 3047, 3240, 3104, 3046 Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3104, 3041 Schneider 3081, 3000, 3072 Scott 3184, 3045, 3121, 3043, 3212 Sears 3035, 3037, 3047, 3000, 3042, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066 Seleco 3041 Semp 3045 Sentra 3020 Sharp 3048, 3062 Shintom 3104, 3072 Shogun 3240 Siemens 3037, 3081, 3104, 3054, 3195 Silva 3037 Singer 3045, 3072 Sinudyne 3081 Solavox 3020 Sonolor 3046 Sontec 3037 Sony 3035, 3032, 3000, 3033, 3034 Sunstar 3000 Suntronic 3000 Sylvania 3035, 3081, 3000, 3043 Symphonic 3000 TMK 3240, 3036, 3208 Tashiko 3000 Tatung 3081, 3000, 3041 Teac 3000, 3041 Tec 3020 Technics 3035, 3162, 3226 Teknika 3035, 3037, 3000 Teleavia 3041 Telefunken 3041, 3187, 3320, 3384 Tenosal 3072 Tensai Thomas Thomson Thorn Toshiba 3000 3000 3041, 3320, 3384 3104, 3041, 3036 3081, 3045, 3043, 3041, 3066, 3212, 3366, 3384 Totevision 3037, 3240 Triumph 3208 Uher 3240 Unitech 3240 Universum 3037, 3081, 3240, 3000, 3195 Vector 3045 Vector Research 3038, 3040 Video Concepts 3045, 3040, 3061 Videosonic 3240 Wards 3060, 3035, 3048, 3047, 3081, 3240, 3000, 3042, 3072, 3062, 3212 White Westinghouse 3278 XR-1000 3035, 3000, 3072 Yamaha 3038 Yamishi 3072 Yokan 3072 Yoko 3240, 3020 Zenith 3039, 3000, 3033, 3034 SETUP CODES FOR LD PLAYER Manufacturer Aiwa Carver Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer Quasar Realistic Salora Samsung Sega Sony Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Yamaha Code 5203 5064, 5194, 5323 5059, 5172 5023 5203 5023 5194, 5217 5064, 5194 5059 5059 5204 5064, 5194 5059, 5023 5204 5203 5064 5323 5023 5193, 5201 5204 5059 5194 5217 SETUP CODES FOR DVD PLAYER Manufacturer JVC Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan RCA Sony Technics Toshiba Yamaha Zenith Code 4558 4534 4503 4521 4503 4490 4503, 4539 4525 4522 4522 4533 4490 4503 4490, 4545 4503 SETUP CODES FOR CD PLAYER Manufacturer ADC Acoustic Research Adcom Aiwa Akai Arcam Audio Pro Audio Research Audio-Technica Audio Ton Audiolab Audiomeca BSR Bestar Burmester Bush California Audio Lab Carver Condor Crown Cyrus DAK DKK Denon Code 6018 6420 6155 6157, 6012, 6124 6156 6157 6437 6157 6170 6157 6157 6157 6245 6164 6420 6245 6029 6157, 6179, 6437 6164 6122 6157 6245 6000 6003, 6034 Elektra 6393, 6437 Emerson 6305, 6155, 6164 Fisher 6179, 6048, 6088, 6342 Garrard 6420, 6393, 6245, 6280, 6425 Genexxa 6032, 6305, 6164, 6426 Goodmans 6305, 6245, 6280 Grundig 6157 Harman/Kardon 6426 Hitachi 6032, 6155 JVC 6072 Kenwood 6028, 6037, 6190, 6048 Kodak 6287 Krell 6157 Kyocera 6018 LXI 6305 Linn 6157 Luxman 6093 MCS 6029, 6043 MTC 6420 Magnavox 6157, 6305 Marantz 6029, 6157, 6180 Matsui 6157 Mclntosh 6287 Memorex 6032, 6305, 6155, 6164, 6180 Meridian 6157 Micromega 6157 Mission 6157 Mitsubishi 6156 NAD 6000 NEC 6043 NSM 6157 Nagaoka 6018 Naim 6157 Nakamichi 6147 Nikko 6164, 6170 Onkyo 6101 Optimus 6000, 6032, 6179, 6305, 6037, 6420, 6048, 6145, 6468, 6087, 6280, 6342, 6426, 6437 Panasonic 6029, 6303 Parasound 6420 Philips 6157, 6287 Pioneer 6032, 6305, 6468, 6244 Poppy 6164 Proton 6157 QED 6157 Quad 6157 Quasar 6029 RCA 6179, 6305, 6053, 6155 Realistic 6179, 6420, 6155, 6164, 6180 Revox 6157 Roadstar 6461 Rotel 6157, 6420 Royal 6420 SAE 6157 STS 6018 Sansui 6157, 6305, 6202 Sanyo 6179, 6048, 6087, 6342 Scott 6305, 6155, 6164 Sears 6305 Sharp 6037, 6180, 6261 Sherwood 6114, 6180, 6426 Shure 6043 Sony 6000, 6185 Soundesign 6145, 6425 Tascam 6420 Teac 6420, 6393, 6180 Technics 6029, 6303 Universum 6157, 6437 Victor 6072 Wards 6157, 6053 Yamaha 6036, 6187, 6261, 6082, 6712 Yorx 6461 SETUP CODES FOR MD RECORDER Manufacturer Kenwood Sony Yamaha Code 7826 7490 7888, 7490 SETUP CODES FOR TAPE DECK Manufacturer Code ADC 8171 Aiwa 8029, 8197 Akai 8283 Arcam 8076 Carver 8029 Denon 8076 Fisher 8074 Garrard 8308, 8309, 8375 GoldStar 8375 Grundig 8029, 8375 JVC 8244, 8274, 8303, 8304, 8310 Kenwood 8071, 8092, 8233, 8234 Kyocera 8171 Magnavox 8029 Marantz 8029, 8009 Memorex 8099 Mitsubishi 8283 Onkyo 8136, 8282 Optimus 8027, 8220, 8337 Panasonic 8229 Philips 8029 Phonotrend 8337 Pioneer 8027, 8220, 8099 Revox 8029, 8190 Sansui 8029, 8009 Sanyo 8074 Sharp 8231 Sherwood 8337 Sonic 8375 Sony 8243, 8170, 8291 Teac 8280, 8289, 8308, 8309 Technics 8229 Universum 8375 Victor 8274 Wards 8027 Yamaha 8097, 8094, 8478, 8524 For Australia model Modèle pour l’Austrarie SETUP CODES FOR TV Continental Edison Manufacturer Abex Acura Admiral Adyson Akai Akura Alaron Alba Code 0032 0009 0093, 0163, 0213 0217, 0032 0208, 0361 0218, 0264, 0369 0216 0037, 0218, 0371, 0009, 0036, 0235 Allorgan 0294 Amplivision 0217 Amstrad 0371, 0009, 0362, 0369 Anam 0009, 0068 Anitech 0009, 0068, 0076 Arcam 0216, 0217 Asberg 0076 Asuka 0218 Atlantic 0206 Audiosonic 0037, 0109 Autovox 0206, 0076, 0336 BPL 0282 BSR 0294 BTC 0218 Baird 0343 Basic Line 0218, 0009 Baur 0037, 0010, 0554, 0349, 0361 Beko 0370 Beon 0037 Binatone 0217 Blaupunkt 0554, 0191, 0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328 Blue Sky 0218 Blue Star 0282 Bondstec 0247 Boots 0217 Brandt 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333, 0335 Brionvega 0362 Britannia 0216 Bush 0037, 0218, 0374, 0371, 0294, 0009, 0282, 0036, 0349 CCE 0037, 0217 CGE 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247, 0306 CS Electronics 0216 CTC 0247 Carrefour 0036 Cascade 0009 Cathay 0037 Centurion 0037 Century 0213 Cimline 0009 Clarivox 0037 Clatronic 0370, 0076, 0247 Condor 0370, 0320 Contec 0216, 0009, 0036, 0157 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333 Crosley 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213 Crown 0037, 0370, 0418, 0009, 0076 Crystal 0431 Curtis Mathes 0093 Cybertron 0218 Daewoo 0037, 0374, 0009 Dainichi 0218, 0215 Dansai 0037 Dayton 0009 De Graaf 0208 Decca 0037, 0072 Dixi 0037, 0009 Dual 0336, 0352 Dual Tec 0217 Dumont 0070 Elbe 0259 Elin 0037 Elite 0218, 0320 Elta 0009 Emerson 0282, 0213, 0361 Erres 0037, 0012 Expert 0206 Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0005, 0073, 0190, 0238, 0287, 0335, 0343 Fidelity 0216, 0361 Finlandia 0208, 0346, 0359 Finlux 0037, 0072, 0070, 0105, 0346 Firstline 0216, 0217, 0294, 0009, 0321, 0247 Fisher 0370, 0217, 0208, 0303 Flint 0455 Formenti 0037, 0320, 0213 Frontech 0264, 0431, 0163, 0247 Fujitsu 0072, 0206 Funai 0294, 0264, 0303 GE 0282, 0093 GEC 0037, 0217, 0072, 0043, 0205 GPM 0218 Geloso 0009, 0213 Genexxa 0218, 0163 GoldStar 0037, 0217, 0109, 0032, 0290 Goodmans 0037, 0217, 0374, 0371, 0072, 0036, 0235, 0317, 0343 Gorenje 0370 Gradiente 0053 Graetz 0163, 0361 Granada 0037, 0217, 0072, 0146, 0208, 0339, 0359 Grandin 0282 Grundig 0037, 0554, 0070, 0191, 0195, 0205 HCM 0009, 0282 Hanseatic 0037, 0320, 0361 Harley Davidson 0043 Harvard 0068 Hinari 0037, 0218, 0009, 0036 Hisawa 0282, 0455 Hitachi 0217, 0036, 0109, 0032, 0043, 0044, 0105, 0163, 0196, 0198, 0225, 0306, 0349 Huanyu 0216, 0374 Hypson 0037, 0282, 0264 ICE 0217, 0371, 0264 ICeS 0218 ITS 0371 ITT 0163, 0361 Imperial 0370, 0418, 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247 Indiana 0037 Ingelen 0163 Inno Hit 0072 Interbuy 0068 Interfunk 0037, 0163, 0247, 0361 Intervision 0037, 0217, 0264, 0102, 0068 Isukai 0218 JVC 0371, 0036, 0053, 0190, 0192 KTV 0217 Kaisui 0216, 0217, 0218, 0009, 0282 Kamp 0216 Kapsch 0206, 0163 Kawasho 0216 Kendo 0037, 0235, 0362 Kingsley 0216 Kneissel 0259 Korpel 0037 Koyoda 0009 Leyco 0037, 0294, 0072, 0264 Liesenk & Tter 0037 Lloytron 0032 Loewe 0075 Luma 0206 Luxor 0349, 0361 M Electronic 0037, 0217, 0374, 0009, 0109, 0068, 0105, 0163, 0287, 0346 MGA 0150 MTC 0216, 0349 Magnadyne 0102, 0247 Magnafon 0102, 0076, 0213 Magnavox 0036 Manesth 0217, 0320, 0264, 0235 Marantz 0037 Mark 0037 Matsui 0037, 0217, 0371, 0294, 0009, 0072, 0036, 0035, 0011, 0208, 0235 Matsushita 0250 McMichael 0043 Mediator 0037, 0012 Memorex 0009, 0250, 0150 Memphis 0337 Metz 0213, 0367 Midland 0032 Minerva 0554, 0070 Minoka 0369 Mitsubishi 0036, 0093, 0108, 0150 Mivar 0216, 0290, 0291, 0292 Motion 0076 Motorola 0093 Multitech 0216, 0217, 0009, 0102, 0076 NEC 0455, 0036 NEI 0037, 0431, 0337 Neckermann 0037, 0554, 0191, 0213, 0349 Nikkai 0037, 0216, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0035, 0032, 0337 Nikko 0317 Nobliko 0102, 0076 Nokia 0361 Nordmende 0109, 0196, 0198, 0213, 0287, 0343 Oceanic 0163, 0215, 0361 Optimus 0250 Optonica 0093 Orion 0037, 0294, 0320, 0321, 0235 Osaki 0217, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0032 Oso 0218 Osume 0072, 0032, 0157 Otake 0317 Otto Versand 0037, 0217, 0320, 0036, 0010, 0554, 0191, 0213, 0343, 0349 Palladium 0370, 0418 Panama 0217, 0264 Panasonic 0250, 0163, 0213, 0214, 0226, 0367 Pathe Cinema 0216, 0320, 0213, 0238 Pathe Marconi 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333 Pausa 0009 Penney 0032 Perdio 0320 Phase 0032 Philco 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213, 0247 Philips 0037, 0374, 0554, 0012, 0043, 0323 Phonola 0037, 0012 Pioneer 0109, 0163, 0287 Profex 0009, 0076, 0361 Proline 0321 Protech 0037, 0217, 0418, 0009, 0264, 0102, 0431, 0247, 0337 Pye 0012 Quasar 0250 Quelle 0037, 0010, 0554, 0011, 0070, 0074, 0084, 0200, 0213, 0306, 0327, 0328, 0361 Questa 0036 R-Line 0037 RBM 0070 RCA 0090, 0093 Radio Shack 0032 Radiola 0037, 0012, 0323 Rank Arena 0036 Realistic 0032 Rediffusion 0361 Revox 0037 Rex 0206, 0264, 0163, 0259 Rhapsody 0216 Roadstar 0218, 0418, 0009, 0264 SBR 0037, 0012, 0043 SEG 0217, 0264, 0036, 0076 SEI 0294, 0102, 0213 Saba 0109, 0075, 0163, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0213, 0287, 0335, 0343 Saccs 0238 Saisho 0009, 0264, 0431, 0011, 0235 Salora 0163, 0349, 0359, 0361 Sambers 0102, 0076, 0213 Sampo 0032 Samsung 0037, 0370, 0217, 0009, 0264, 0032, 0090, 0290 Sandra 0216 Sanyo 0072, 0036, 0011, 0146, 0157, 0208, 0213, 0339 Schaub Lorenz 0361 Schneider 0037, 0218, 0371, 0247, 0303, 0323, 0336, 0352 Sears 0146 Sei-Sinudyne 0010 Seleco 0206, 0163, 0259, 0362 Sentra 0035 Sharp 0036, 0093, 0157 Shorai 0294 Siarem 0102, 0213 Siemens 0037, 0554, 0157, 0191, 0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328 Silver 0036 Sinudyne 0294, 0102, 0213, 0235 Solavox 0032, 0163 Sonitron 0208 Sonoko 0037, 0009 Sonolor 0163, 0208, 0215 Sontec 0037 Sony 0036, 0010, 0011 Soundwave 0037, 0418 Standard 0217, 0218, 0009 Stern 0206, 0163, 0259 Sunkai 0294, 0321 Susumu 0218 Sysline 0037 Tandy 0217, 0218, 0072, 0093, 0163 Tashiko 0217, 0036, 0043, 0359 Tatung 0037, 0217, 0072 Tec 0217, 0247 Technema 0320 Technics 0250 Teknika 0150 Teleavia 0205, 0333, 0343 Telefunken 0109, 0005, 0074, 0084, 0101, 0213, 0262, 0306, 0335, 0343 Telemeister 0320 Teletech 0009 Teleton 0217, 0206, 0349 Tensai 0218, 0294, 0320, 0317 Texet 0216, 0218 Thomson 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0287, 0333, 0343, 0349 Thorn 0037, 0072, 0035, 0074, 0084, 0190, 0192, 0361 Thorn-Ferguson 0343 Tomashi 0282 Toshiba 0036, 0035, 0070, 0243 Trical 0157 Triumph 0243 Uher 0206, 0320, 0303 Ultra 0192 Ultravox 0102 Universum 0037, 0370, 0264, 0105, 0346 Vestel 0037 Victor 0053 Videosat 0247 Videotechnic 0217 Vidtech 0036 Vision 0320 Voxson 0163 Waltham 0217 Watson 0037, 0320 Watt Radio 0102 Wega 0036 White Westinghouse 0037, 0216, 0320 Yoko 0037, 0217, 0264, 0431 Zanussi 0206 SETUP CODES FOR CABLE Manufacturer SETUP CODES FOR DBS TUNER Code Manufacturer ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1017 Birgmingham Cable Communications 1276 British Telecom 1003, 1105 Cabletime 1161, 1271, 1377 Clyde 1086 Contec 1019 Decsat 1423 Filmnet 1443 France Telecom 1451 GEC 1086 General Instrument 1276 GoldStar 1144 Jerrold 1003, 1276, 1014 MNet 1443, 1019 Magnavox 1032 Memorex 1000 Movie Time 1156 NSC 1156 Oak 1019 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003 Panasonic 1000 Paragon 1000 Pioneer 1144, 1260 Pulsar 1000 Runco 1000 STS 1156 Salora 1382 Samsung 1144 Satbox 1375 Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1277, 1017 Starcom 1003 Tele+1 1443 Teleservice 1281 Toshiba 1000 Tudi 1286 United Cable 1003 Videoway 1250 Westminster 1105 Zenith 1000 Code AST 2321, 2351 Alba 2455, 2421, 2362, 2613 Aldes 2288 Allantide 2333 Amstrad 2080, 2252, 2345, 2461, 2501 Ankaro 2369, 2288, 2220, 2519, 2217 Anttron 2421, 2183 Arcon 2368 Armstrong 2243 Astra 2108, 2539 Astro 2520, 2173, 2358, 2501 Avalon 2396 Axis 2369, 2530 BT 2668 Barcom 2217 Beko 2189 Best 2369, 2217 Blaupunkt 2173 Boca 2243, 2513 Brain Wave 2332 Bush 2067 CNT 2520 Cambridge 2344 Channel Master 2362 Chaparral 2053, 2209 CityCom 2394 Commlink 2288 Connexions 2396 Crown 2243 Cyrus 2200 D-box 2723 DDC 2362 DNT 2396, 2200 Diskxpress 2217 Drake 2268 EIF 2417 Echostar 2396, 2871 Emanon 2421 FTE 2331 Ferguson 2183, 2067, 2189, 2336 Fidelity 2252 Finlux 2455, 2108, 2344, 2397 Fracarro 2871 Freecom 2421, 2335 Fuba 2421, 2369, 2396, 2217, 2297, 2417 G-Sat 2183 Galaxis 2288, 2834, 2863 Galaxisat 2321 GoldStar 2335 Gooding 2571 Goodmans 2189 Grothusen 2335 Grundig 2571, 2173, 2189, 2328 Harting und Helling 2333 Hinari 2183 Hirschmann 2502, 2173, 2573, 2287, 2333, 2397, 2398 Hitachi 2455 Houston 2668 Huth 2243, 2288, 2220, 2346 ITT 2108 InVideo 2871 Intervision 2592 JVC 2571 Johansson 2332 Kathrein 2173, 2200, 2092, 2331, 2358, 2394, 2442, 2480, 2504 Kosmos 2331, 2335 Kreiselmeyer 2173 Kyostar 2421 La Sat 2520, 2513, 2464 Lemon 2692 Lenco 2421, 2335 Lennox 2592 Lupus 2369 Luxor 2573, 2108 Manhattan 2455, 2592, 2520 Marantz 2200 Maspro 2092, 2328, 2336 Matsui 2571, 2344 Mediamarkt 2243 Micro Technology 2333, 2539 Minerva 2571 Morgan’s 2243, 2513 Multistar 2331, 2464 Muratto 2335 Navex 2332 Neuhaus 2501 Neusat 2692, 2834 Newhaus 2220 Nikko 2360 Nokia 2455, 2573, 2108, 2328, 2397, 2873 Nordmende 2362 Orbitech 2501 Oxford 2344 Pace 2455, 2183, 2067, 2328, 2336, 2791 Palcom 2297 Palladium 2571 Palsat 2501 Panda 2455 Philips 2455, 2571, 2200, 2292, 2328 Phonotrend 2288, 2592 Planet 2871 Plasmatic 2442 Polytron 2394 Promax 2455 Prosat 2288 Quadral 2362, 2519 RFT 2288, 2220, 2200 Radiola 2200 Radix 2396, 2882 SAT 2321, 2351, 2461 SEG 2421, 2369, 2539 STVI 2417 Saba 2520, 2336 Sabre 2455 Sagem 2820 Salora 2108 Samsung SatPartner 2287 2421, 2332, 2520, 2502, 2335, 2692 Satcom 2605, 2346 Satec 2183, 2328 Satmaster 2346 Schwaiger 2183, 2394, 2504 Seemann 2396, 2530 Siemens 2173 Skymaster 2288, 2605, 2519 Star Trak 2421 Strong 2421 Sunstar 2513 TPS 2820 Tantec 2455, 2297, 2336 TechniSat 2262, 2501 Techniland 2346 Telefunken 2421 Teleka 2243, 2613 Telesat 2605 Thomson 2455 Tonna 2668, 2346 Triad 2321, 2333, 2335, 2351 Triasat 2501 Unitor 2332, 2217 Universum 2571, 2173 Vector 2333 Ventana 2200 Vortec 2421 Vtech 2351 Wevasat 2333 Winersat 2332 Wisi 2455, 2396, 2173, 2321, 2351, 2372, 2406, 2407 XSat 2889 Xcom Multimedia 2889 Zehnder 2520, 2321, 2331 SETUP CODES FOR VCR Manufacturer Emerson Code ASA 3037, 3081 Admiral 3048 Adventura 3000 Aiko 3278 Aiwa 3000, 3037, 3307, 3348, 3352 Akai 3315, 3106, 3041, 3053 Akiba 3072 Alba 3072, 3020, 3278, 3209, 3315, 3352 Ambassador 3020 Amstrad 3000, 3278, 3325, 3332 Anitech 3072 Asha 3240 Asuka 3037 Audiovox 3037 Baird 3000, 3041, 3104, 3107 Basic Line 3072, 3020, 3278 Beaumark 3240 Bell & Howell 3104 Blaupunkt 3034, 3226, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3154, 3162, 3227, 3403 Brandt 3320, 3187, 3321 Brandt Electronic 3041 Broksonic 3209 Bush 3072, 3278, 3209, 3352 CCE 3072, 3278 CGE 3000 Calix 3037 Capehart 3020 Carver 3081 Catron 3020 Cimline 3072 Cineral 3278 Citizen 3037, 3278 Clatronic 3020 Colt 3072 Combitech 3352 Condor 3020 Craig 3072, 3037, 3047, 3240 Crown 3072, 3020, 3278 Curtis Mathes 3041, 3162 Cybernex 3240 Cyrus 3081 Daewoo 3020, 3278, 3045 Dansai 3072 Daytron 3020 De Graaf 3042, 3166 Decca 3000, 3081 Denon 3042 Dual 3041 Dumont 3000, 3081, 3104 Dynatech 3000 ESC 3278, 3240 Elbe 3038 Elcatech 3072 Electrohome 3037 Electrophonic 3037 Emerex 3032 Ferguson Fidelity Finlandia Finlux Firstline Fisher Frontech Fuji Funai GE GEC Garrard General Go Video GoldHand GoldStar Goodmans 3000, 3037, 3278, 3209, 3036, 3043, 3088 3320, 3041, 3107, 3321 3000 3081, 3104 3000, 3081, 3042, 3104 3072, 3037, 3209, 3045, 3043 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104 3020 3033 3000 3048, 3240 3081 3000 3020 3432 3072 3037, 3038, 3225 3072, 3000, 3020, 3037, 3278, 3403 Gradiente 3000, 3008 Graetz 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240 Granada 3081, 3046, 3104 Grandin 3072, 3000, 3037 Grundig 3072, 3081, 3347, 3226, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3007, 3207, 3349, 3403 HCM 3072 HI-Q 3047 Hanseatic 3037 Harley Davidson 3000 Harman/Kardon 3038 Harwood 3072 Headquarter 3046 Hinari 3072, 3004, 3240, 3352 Hitachi 3000, 3004, 3042, 3041, 3166, 3235, 3240 Hypson 3072 ITT 3106, 3046, 3384, 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240 ITV 3037, 3278 Imperial 3000 Ingersol 3004 Interfunk 3081 JVC 3067, 3384, 3008, 3041, 3206, 3207, 3486 Jensen 3041 KEC 3037, 3278 KLH 3072 Kaisui 3072 Kendo 3209, 3106 Kenwood 3067, 3384, 3038, 3041 Kodak 3037 Korpel 3072 LXI 3037 Lenco 3278 Leyco 3072 LIoyd’s 3000 Loewe 3037, 3004, 3081, 3006 Logik 3072, 3004, 3240 Luxor 3106, 3048, 3046, 3043, 3104 M Electronic MGA MGN Technology MTC Magnasonic Magnavox Magnin Manesth Marantz Marta Matsui 3000 3043, 3240 3240 3000, 3240 3278 3000, 3081 3240 3072, 3045 3081, 3003, 3006 3037 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088, 3348, 3352 Matsushita 3162 Memorex 3000, 3037, 3048, 3046, 3047, 3104, 3162, 3240, 3307 Memphis 3072 Metz 3347, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3162, 3227 Minerva 3195, 3006 Minolta 3042 Mitsubishi 3081, 3067, 3048, 3043 Motorola 3048 Multitech 3072, 3000 Murphy 3000 NEC 3067, 3038, 3041, 3104 Neckermann 3081 Nesco 3072 Nikko 3037 Nikon 3034 Noblex 3240 Nokia 3106, 3046, 3041, 3104, 3240 Nordmende 3320, 3384, 3041, 3297, 3321 Oceanic 3000, 3041 Okano 3315, 3348 Olympus 3226 Optimus 3037, 3432, 3048, 3104, 3162 Orion 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088, 3348, 3352 Osaki 3072, 3000, 3037 Otto Versand 3081 Palladium 3072, 3037, 3006, 3041 Panasonic 3226, 3162, 3225, 3227 Pathe Cinema 3036 Pathe Marconi 3041 Penney 3037, 3042, 3038, 3054, 3240 Pentax 3042 Perdio 3000 Philco 3209, 3038 Philips 3081, 3384, 3403 Phonola 3081 Pilot 3037 Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235 Portland 3020 Profex 3322 Profitronic 3240 Proline 3000 Protec 3072 Pye 3081 Quarter 3046 Quartz 3046 Quasar 3162 Quelle RCA RFT Radio Shack Radiola Radix Randex Realistic 3081 3106, 3042, 3048, 3240 3403 3000, 3037 3081 3037 3037 3000, 3037, 3048, 3046, 3047, 3104 Rex 3384, 3041 Ricoh 3034 Roadstar 3072, 3037, 3278, 3240 SBR 3081 SEG 3322, 3240 SEI 3004, 3081 STS 3042 Saba 3320, 3384, 3041, 3206, 3207, 3297, 3321 Saisho 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088 Salora 3106, 3046, 3043 Samsung 3432, 3045, 3053, 3240 Sanky 3048 Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041 Sanyo 3046, 3047, 3104, 3240 Saville 3352 Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3005, 3041, 3104 Schneider 3072, 3000, 3081 Scott 3045, 3043 Sears 3000, 3037, 3042, 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104 Seleco 3041 Semp 3045 Sentra 3020 Sharp 3048 Shintom 3072, 3104 Shogun 3240 Shorai 3004 Siemens 3037, 3081, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3054, 3104 Silva 3037 Singer 3072, 3045 Sinudyne 3004, 3081 Solavox 3020 Sonolor 3046 Sontec 3037 Sony 3000, 3032, 3033, 3034, 3011 Sunkai 3348 Sunstar 3000 Suntronic 3000 Sylvania 3000, 3081, 3043 Symphonic 3000 TMK 3036, 3240 Tashiko 3000 Tatung 3000, 3081, 3041 Teac 3000, 3041 Tec 3020 Technics 3226, 3162 Teknika 3000, 3037 Teleavia 3041 Telefunken 3320, 3384, 3041, 3187, 3321 Tenosal 3072 Tensai Thomas Thomson Thorn Toshiba 3322, 3000 3000 3320, 3384, 3041 3036, 3041, 3104 3081, 3045, 3384, 3041, 3043 Totevision 3037, 3240 Towada 3322 Uher 3240 Unitech 3240 Universum 3000, 3037, 3081, 3106, 3195, 3006, 3240, 3325 Vector 3045 Vector Research 3038 Video Concepts 3045 Videosonic 3240 Wards 3072, 3000, 3081, 3042, 3048, 3047, 3240 White Westinghouse 3278 XR-1000 3072, 3000 Yamaha 3038 Yamishi 3072 Yokan 3072 Yoko 3020, 3240 Zenith 3000, 3033, 3034 SETUP CODES FOR DVD PLAYER Manufacturer Kenwood Magnavox Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha Zenith Code 4534 4503 4503 4490 4539, 4503 4525 4533 4490 4551 4503 4490, 4545 4503 SETUP CODES FOR LD PLAYER Manufacturer Aiwa Carver Cyrus Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer Quasar Radiola Realistic Salora Sega Sharp Sony Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Thorn Yamaha Code 5203 5064, 5194 5388 5059, 5172 5023 5203 5023 5194, 5217 5064, 5194 5059 5059 5204, 5496 5064, 5388, 5194 5023, 5059 5204 5388 5203 5064 5023 5001 5193, 5201 5204, 5496 5059 5194 5014 5217 SETUP CODES FOR CD PLAYER Manufacturer Aiwa Akai Alba Arcam Audio Research Audio Ton Audiolab Audiomeca BSR Bestar Binatone California Audio Lab Carver Condor Cyrus DKK Denon Dual Emerson Fisher GE Genexxa GoldStar Code 6124, 6157, 6419 6108, 6156, 6199 6536, 6288, 6334 6157 6157 6157 6157 6157 6134 6164 6452 6029 6157, 6179 6134, 6164 6157 6000 6003, 6034 6196 6164 6048, 6179, 6342 6334 6032, 6164 6525, 6383 Goodmans Grundig Harman/Kardon Hitachi JVC Kenwood Kodak Krell Linn Luxman M Electronic MCS Magnavox Marantz Matsui Mclntosh Memorex Meridian Micromega Mission Mitsubishi NAD NSM Naim Nikko Onkyo Optimus Panasonic Philips Pioneer Poppy Proton QED Quad Quasar RCA Realistic Revox Roadstar Rotel SAE Sansui Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Sherwood Siemens Signature Sony Teac Technics Toshiba Universum Victor Wards Yamaha Yorx 6536 6157 6108, 6173 6032, 6291 6072 6037, 6523, 6028, 6048, 6190 6287 6157 6157 6328 6525 6029 6157, 6038, 6129 6157, 6029, 6038, 6129 6157, 6288, 6307 6287 6032, 6164 6157 6157 6157 6108, 6156 6000 6157 6157 6525, 6164 6101, 6102 6000, 6032, 6037, 6536, 6048, 6179, 6196, 6342 6303, 6029, 6367 6157, 6274, 6287 6032 6164 6157 6157 6157 6029 6179 6164, 6179 6157, 6113 6461, 6525, 6527 6157 6157 6157, 6202, 6513 6048, 6179, 6342 6134 6164 6037, 6262, 6265 6114, 6196 6516 6108 6000, 6490 6378 6207, 6303, 6029 6481 6157 6072 6157, 6108 6036, 6082, 6187, 6712 6461 SETUP CODES FOR MD RECORDER Manufacturer Kenwood Sony Yamaha Code 7826 7490 7888, 7490 SETUP CODES FOR TAPE DECK Manufacturer Aiwa Akai Arcam Carver Denon Fisher Grundig Harman/Kardon JVC Kenwood Code 8029, 8197, 8200 8188, 8189 8076 8029 8076, 8412 8074 8029 8182 8244, 8273, 8274 8070, 8071, 8092, 8205, 8233, 8234 Magnavox 8029 Marantz 8029, 8009 Memorex 8099, 8101 Mitsubishi 8189 Onkyo 8136, 8135 Optimus 8027, 8220 Panasonic 8229 Philips 8029 Pioneer 8027, 8099, 8101, 8220 Revox 8029 Sansui 8029, 8009 Sanyo 8074 Sharp 8205 Sony 8170, 8243 Technics 8229 Victor 8273, 8274 Wards 8027 Yamaha 8094, 8097, 8205, 8478, 8524 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Malaysia V293670 Quick Reference Card m AMP/TUN POWER m TAPE/MD AMP/TUN STANDBY POWER STANDBY POWER /DTS SURROUND CD INPUT /DTS SURROUND CD 3 1 DISCO 4 TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 JAZZ CLUB DVD/LD 4 8 HALL EXT. DEC. +10 ROCK CHURCH V-AUX 7 PHONO 9 7 TEST HALL +100 EXT. DEC. TEST CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E MONO MOVIE INPUT 5 ROCK PHONO 0 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 DVD/LD EXT. DEC. MOVIE THEATER 1 0 EFCT DSP CH ON/OFF CH TV VOLUME UP/DOWN (TV VOLUME) ON SCREEN VOLUME INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER SLEEP VCR REC TV SELECT RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU CD 3 1 DISCO MONO MOVIE VCR 6 INPUT DVD/LD 4 5 V-AUX 8 +10 DISC SKIP PRESET CH ROCK CHURCH PHONO 9 7 HALL TEST +100 EXT. DEC. CLEAR 0 EFCT DSP SET MENU MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 1 REWIND BACKWARD (MD) V-AUX 8 +10 ROCK CHURCH PHONO 9 7 TEST HALL +100 EXT. DEC. CLEAR 0 EFCT DSP DISC SKIP CH DSP POWER VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 ON/OFF CH TV (TV VOLUME) DISC SKIP CH VOLUME TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU INDEX DECK A/B PAUSE DIR B SKIP (MD) STOP FAST FORWARD (TV POWER) VCR REC TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT (TV VOLUME) VCR REC TV ON SCREEN TV INPUT SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN PAUSE SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU DIR A STOP FAST FORWARD PLAY SUBTITLE (DVD)/ BACKWARD (LD) (TV INPUT) A/B / SKIP/SEARCH DIR A DISPLAY DISP POWER (TV POWER) PAUSE SKIP BACKWARD CH INDEX SLEEP A/B / PLAY (TV INPUT) ON/OFF VOLUME DISPLAY DISP POWER CLEAR EFCT MUTE SLEEP 9 TEST +100 TV MUTE DISPLAY (MD) CHURCH ENTER DISC SKIP PRESET MUTE DISP 3 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS A/B/C/D/E SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD) m DSP 4 MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 CODE SET INDEX ON/OFF DVD/LD MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER CODE SET SLEEP DIR A MONO MOVIE INPUT 5 JAZZ CLUB DISC SKIP PRESET ON/OFF CH STANDBY CODE SET POWER REC/PAUSE CD 3 DISCO ENTER TV VCR REC /DTS SURROUND TAPE/MD 2 A/B/C/D/E VOLUME (TV POWER) POWER DVD/LD (TV VOLUME) DIR A SKIP (MD) PLAY DIR B SET UP ON/OFF LEVEL (TV POWER) TV INPUT A/B / DIR A ON SCREEN /DTS SURROUND MOVIE THEATER 2 TV SPORTS DVD/LD POWER TAPE/MD TV/DBS JAZZ CLUB STANDBY CD 2 DSP CODE SET MUTE POWER POWER A/B/C/D/E EFFECT ON/OFF PRESET +/– MUTE MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER m DVD/LD CD ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP DISC SKIP PRESET m CD TAPE/MD TUNER 1 STANDBY POWER AMP/TUN MONO MOVIE TAPE/MD SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO ON/OFF TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU STOP ANGLE (DVD)/ FAST FORWARD (LD) AUDIO (DVD) STANDBY DSP /DTS SURROUND CD 1 DSP program MONO MOVIE DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS TV/DBS VCR 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E V296050 Quick Reference Card m DVD MENU DVDMENU m VCR POWER POWER STANDBY m CBL/DBS VCR POWER STANDBY POWER POWER 1 MONO MOVIE Numeric keys DVD/LD 4 ROCK PHONO 7 HALL EXT. DEC. 0 MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER 1 TV/DBS VCR DVD/LD 4 6 ROCK 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 PHONO CHURCH 7 9 HALL TEST +100 CLEAR CLEAR A/B/C/D/E DSP CH MONO MOVIE CHANNEL DISCO EXT. DEC. CHANNEL ENTER 0 CH CODE SET CHANNEL (TV VOLUME) +(UP)/–(DOWN) MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SURROUND TAPE/MD CD 3 1 2 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 V-AUX 8 DVD/LD 4 +10 ROCK CHURCH PHONO 9 7 TEST HALL +100 EXT. DEC. CHANNEL ENTER CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E CH MONO MOVIE CHANNEL 5 JAZZ CLUB EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET ON/OFF TV MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET DISC SKIP CD 3 ENTER +10 /DTS SURROUND MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 TV SPORTS POWER STANDBY 0 CODE SET CHANNEL (TV VOLUME) +(UP)/–(DOWN) /DTS SURROUND CD 3 1 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 V-AUX 8 +10 ROCK PHONO 7 TEST HALL +100 +100 CLEAR EFCT CH CODE SET INDEX DISP SLEEP POWER (TV POWER) VCR REC TV MENU SELECT SET UP TITLE DIR A TV INPUT (TV INPUT) A/B / MENU LEFT ON SCREEN SELECT DIR B SET UP RETURN SUBTITLE ON/OFF ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RETURN MENU (TV POWER) VCR REC (*1) PLAY POWER VCR REC ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / (TV INPUT) PAUSE DIR A SET UP REWIND TV INDEX DISPLAY SUBTITLE ON/OFF SELECT DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU STOP FAST FORWARD *1: Press this key twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour démarrer l’enregistrement. Diese Taste zweimal drücken, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på denna knapp för att starta inspelningen. DISP SLEEP POWER (TV POWER) MENU SELECT MENU LEFT VCR REC TV DIR A SET UP SUBTITLE ON/OFF SELECT DISPLAY ON SCREEN TV INPUT A/B / 0 DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU (TV INPUT) MENU UP MENU RIGHT MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 3 2 DISCO TV SPORTS VCR TV/DBS 6 5 JAZZ CLUB V-AUX 8 +10 CHURCH 9 TEST +100 TV EFFECT ON/OFF CLEAR ENTER A/B/C/D/E DSP EFCT DISC SKIP PRESET CH ON/OFF CH TV TV VOLUME CODE SET TV MUTE VOLUME DISP SLEEP CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL (TV VOLUME) +(UP)/–(DOWN) MUTE INDEX EXT. DEC. ON/OFF TV VOLUME 4 9 MUTE TITLE/INDEX DVD/LD CHURCH ENTER CH MONO MOVIE CHANNEL 5 JAZZ CLUB DISC SKIP PRESET CH MOVIE THEATER 2 TAPE/MD 2 A/B/C/D/E ON/OFF TV MOVIE THEATER 1 TUNER DSP MUTE VOLUME STANDBY TV CBL/DBS DVDMENU CD TV POWER VCR /DTS SURROUND m TV CBL/DBS MUTE VOLUME INDEX TV SLEEP POWER VCR REC (VCR) DISP SLEEP TV ON SCREEN A/B / DISPLAY TV INPUT TV INPUT TV POWER MENU DOWN RECALL MENU DIR A SET UP SUBTITLE ON/OFF SELECT DIR B RETURN ANGLE AUDIO TITLE MENU LEVEL SET MENU (VCR) Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Oprima dos veces esta tecla para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. V296070